Owners Manual

MERIVA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

M E R I VA
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: January 2007.

TS 1578-B-07
 VAUXHALL Meriva

Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Data specific to your ve hicle
Please enter your vehicles data here to keep it ea sily accessible.
This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate and in the Serv ice Booklet.

Fuel
Designati on

Engine oil
Gra de

Viscosity

Tyre pressure
Tyre si ze wi th up to 3 persons wi th full load
S ummer tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Weights
Permissible Gross Vehic le Weight

EC k erbweight

= Loading
Your Meriva
is an intelligent c om bina tion of forward-
looking technology, impressiv e safety ,
env ironmenta l friendliness a nd economy.
It now lies with you to drive your vehicle
safely and ensure that it perform s
perfectly. This O wners Manual provides
you with all the necessary information to
that end.
Make sure y our pa ssengers a re awa re
of the p ossible risk of accid ent and injury
which may result from im proper use of the
vehic le.
You m ust alway s comply w ith the sp ecific
laws of the c ountry that y ou are travelling
through. These laws ma y differ from the
inform ation in this Ow ners Manual.
When this Manual refers to a workshop
visit, we recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide
first-class serv ice at reasona ble prices.
You will rec eive quick, reliable and
indiv idua l service.
Exp erienced mechanics, trained by
Vauxhall, work according to specific
Vauxhall instructions.
The O wners Ma nual should alwa ys be kept
in the vehic le: R eady to hand in the g lov e
compartment.
Make us e of the Owners Manual:
z The "In Brief" section will give you an
initial overv iew.
z The ta ble of contents at the beg inning
of the owners manual and within the
individual chapters will show y ou where
every thing is.
z Its index will help you find what you
want.
z It w ill fa miliarise you with the
sophisticated technology.
z It w ill increase y our pleasure in your
vehicle.
z It w ill help you to handle your vehic le
expertly .
The O wners Manual is designed to be
clearly laid-out and easily understood.
This sym bol signifies:
6 Continue read ing on next pa ge.
3 Items m arked with an asterisk are not
fitted to all v ehicles (model variants,
engine op tions, models specific to one
country, optional equipment, Genuine
Vauxhall Parts and Acc essories).
9 Warnin g
Text marked 9 Warning provides
information on risk of accident or injury.
Disregard of the instructions may lead to
injuries or endanger life.
Inform your passengers accordingly.
Y ellow arrows in the illustrations serve as
points of reference or indicate some action
to be performed.
Black arrows in the illustrations indicate
a reaction or a second action to be
performed.
Direc tional da ta, e.g. left or right, or front
or back, in the descriptions alway s relate to
the direction of travel.
We wish y ou many hours of p leasurab le
driving
Your Vauxhal l Tea m
 Comm itment to c ustomer
Contents satisfaction:
In Brief .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 2
K eys, Doors, Windows .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 26
Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your S eats, Interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 43
vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers Instrum ents, Controls ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 84
offer first-class serv ice a t competitiv e Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 105
prices. Experienced, factory-trained Infotainment S ystem . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 114
technicians w ork according to factory C lim ate C ontrol . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 117
instructions. Y our Authorised Repa irer can Driving and Operation ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 132
supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALL- S elf-help, Vehicle C are ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 170
APPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone
Technical Data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 206
stringent quality and precision chec ks, and
S ervice, Maintenance ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 224
of course useful and a ttrac tiv e
VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES. Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 238
Our nam e i s your guara ntee!
For d eta ils of the
Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork,
please r ing this number; 0845 090 2044
2 In Brief

In Brief

Pictu re no: 15335T.tif Picture no: 17873s.tif

To unlock and open the doors:
Press bu tton q and lift door
handle
All doors and the luggage compartment
are unlocked.
Country -specific version 3:
Pressing once unlocks the drivers door,
and pressing twice unlocks the entire
vehicle.
To unlock an d open the luggage
com partment:
Press button q on remote c ontrol
and operate button beneath
handle
6 Radio frequency rem ote control
see page 28,
central loc king see pag e 30,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 see page 34.

6 Door locks see pag e 26,

key s see page 26,
electronic im mobiliser see pag e 27,
ra dio frequency rem ote control
see p age 28,
central locking see page 30,
Vauxhall a la rm system 3 see pag e 34.
 In Brief 3

Pict ure no: 13977s.t if Picture no: 13978s.tif Picture no: 13979s.tif
To adjust front seats: Adjust front seat backrests: To adjust fron t seat height:
Pull han dle, Turn handwheel Pull front lever at side
slide seat, Move backrest to suit seating position. Lift lev er and relieve some weig ht from seat
release handle Do not lean on seat b ackrest while to raise it or press down on seat cushion
6 S eats see page 43, with body weig ht to lower it.
adjusting it.
seat p osition see page 44. 6 Sea ts see page 43,
6 Seats see page 43,
seat position see pag e 44.
9 Warning seat position see page 44.

Important: Do not sit nearer than

10 inches (25 cm ) from the steering
wheel, to permit sa fe airbag deployment.
4 In Brief
Pict ure no: 13980s.t if
To adjust head restraint height of
front and rear ou tboard seats:
Tilt head restrain t forward to
release,
hold and adjust h eigh t,
engage
6 H ead restra ints see pa ge 45,
rea r centre head restraint see page 45,
head restraint position see pag e 46,
head restraint removal see page 46.
Picture no: 13982.tif Picture no: 13985s.tif
To fit seat belt: To adjust exterior mirro rs:
Draw seat belt smooth ly from From inside,
inertia reel, guide over sho ulder swivel lever in required direc tion
and engage in buckle 6 Mirrors see p age 37,
The seat b elt must not be twisted at any further inform ation, aspherical ex terior
point. The lap belt m ust lie snugly a gainst mirror 3 see page 37.
the body . The front seat backrests must not
be tilted back too far (recomm ended
maximum tilting a ng le app rox . 25 ).
To relea se belt, press red button on belt
buckle.
6 Three-point seat belts see page 58,
airbag system see page 67,
seat position see page 44.

Pict ure no: 16099s.t if
To adjust electrically adjustable
exterior mirrors 3:
Four-way switch in drivers do or
Toggle roc ker switch to left or right:
Four-way switch moves appropriate mirror.
6 M irrors see pag e 37,
fold-in ex terior mirrors see page 37,
further information, a spheric al ex terior
mirror, hea ted exterior m irrors 3
see pages 12, 37, 119.
In Brief 5
Picture no: 14300s.tif
Adjusting in terior mirror:
Swivel mirror housing
Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing
to reduce dazzle at night.
6 Interior mirror see p age 38,
autom atic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3
see p age 38.
6 In Brief

Page
1 Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 118
2 Front pa ssengers airbag . .... ..... .... . 67
3 Infotainm ent system 3 . .... .... ..... ... 114
4 Haza rd warning lights .. .... .... .. 10, 107
LED for
Vauxhall alarm system 3 . .... ..... .... ..34
Heated seats 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 119
5 Central information display
for time, date,
outside tem perature,
Infotainm ent system 3 . .... .... ..... .... . 92
6 Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 118
7 Turn signal light, headlight flash,
dipped beam, hig h beam . .... ..... .... . 10
Door-to-door lighting func tion .. ... 110
Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 151
8 Horn .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 11
9 Instruments .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 84
In Brief 7
Pa ge Page
10 Windscreen wiper, 18 C lutch pedal 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 138
wind screen wash system,
19 Ashtray .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 80
headlight wash system 3 and Accessory socket and
rear window w ash system 3 ... 11, 103 cigarette lighter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 79
11 Pa rk ing lights, dipped beam ... ..... 105 20 Air conditioning system 3 ... ..... .... 117
Courtesy light .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Heated rear w indow ... ..... .... .... 12, 119
Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 111 Air recirc ulation system 3 .... ..... .... 123
Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107
Front fog lights 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 106 21 C lim ate c ontrol .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 117
Head lig ht range adjustment .... ..... 107 22 Glove compartment ... ..... .... ..... .... .. 81
12 Bonnet release lev er .... .... ..... .... .... 170 23 Fusebox . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 188
13 Remote control on steering
wheel .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 114
14 Starter switch
with steering column lock ..... .... ..... ... 9
15 Steering wheel adjustm ent 3 ... ..... ... 9
16 Ac celera tor pedal .... .... .... ..... 138, 139
17 Brake peda l ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 138, 154
8 In Brief
Control indicato rs
S ea t belt w arning dev ice 3,
X see p age 87.
see pa ge 84.
B A dapti ve Forw ard
Light ing (AFL) 3,
see pa ges 84, 109.
Front fog lights 3,
>
see pa ges 85, 106.
A Engine elec tronics,
t ransmission el ec tronics,
i mmobi liser,
d iesel fuel filt er 3,
Easyt ronic 3,
fa ult,
see pa ges 85, 27, 147.
Exha ust em issi on 3,
Z Seat occup ancy r ecog ni tion 3,
see pa ges 85, 147.
A irbag system s 3,
v see page 151.
bel t tensi oners,
see pa ges 60, 72.
Eng ine oi l pressure, Brake system,
I R
see page 86. clutch system 3,
O Turn signal l ights,
see pages 10, 86. u Anti-lock Brak e S ystem (ABS),
see p age 156.
C Headli ght ma in beam,
see pages 9, 86. S Engine oil l ev el 3,
see p age 88.
! Preheat ing system for
diesel eng ines 3 , EPS Electri c Power Steering (EPS) 3,
diesel part icle filter 3 , see p age 88.
see page 88.
v Electronic Stab ility Program me
j Easytronic 3, (ESP Pl us ) 3,
start engi ne 3 , see p age 149.
see page 133.
Y Fuel level,
T Easytronic 3, see p ages 88, 143.
wi nt er program me,
see page 135. y
see p ages 73, 74.
m Crui se control 3,
r Fog tail light,
see pages 87, 107.
p Alternat or,
see page 87.
 In Brief 9

Pi cture no: 15678t.tif Picture no: 13981s.tif Picture no: 14727s.tif

Steering column lock an d ignition: Steering wheel adju stment 3: Turn ligh t switch:
Turn key to position 1; Swivel lever down, 7 = Off
Move steerin g wh eel slightly adjust height, 8 = Parking lights
to release lock swivel lever up, 9 = Dipped beam
Positions: engage
0 = Ignition off
or main beam
Ad just steering wheel only when vehicle is
1 = Steering free, ignition off stationary and steering column lock is Press button:
2 = Ignition on, relea sed. > = Front fog lights 3
for diesel engines: preheating 6 Airbag system see page 67.
3 = Starting
r = Fog tail light
0 = Courtesy light
6 S tarting see page 14,
electronic immobiliser see page 27, 6 Lighting see p age 105,
parking the vehicle see p age 15. hea dlight warning dev ic e see page 103.
10 In Brief

Pict ure no: 18475s.t if Pict ure no: 14054h.tif Picture no: 14303s.tif
Headlight flash, m ain beam and Switch on turn signal lights: Hazard warning lights:
dipped beam: Right = Stalk up On = Press
Headlight = Pull stalk Left = Stalk down Off = Press again
flash towards
6 Turn signal lights see pa ge 106. 6 Hazard warning lig hts see p age 107.
steering wheel
Main beam = Push stalk
fo rwards
Dipped beam = Push stalk
fo rwards again
Main beam, headlight flash see
page 106.

Pict ure no: 13991s.t if
Horn operatio n:
Press j
6 Airbag sy stem 3 see page 67,
rem ote control on steering wheel 3
see page 114.
In Brief 11
Pict ure no: 14055h.tif Picture no: 14056h.tif
Windscreen wiper: Operating windscreen and
Stalk up headlight wash systems 3:
= Off Pull stalk towards steerin g wheel
$ = Adjustable timed interval The wiper w ill swipe for a few strok es.
wipe The headlight wash system 3 can be
% = Slo w operated w hen the lights are on.
& = Fast 6 Windscreen wash sy stem
see page 104,
6 Windscreen wiper see p age 103, further inform ation see pages 204, 234.
adjustable timed interval wipe 3
see p age 103,
further information see pag es 204, 233.
12 In Brief

Pi cture no: 14057h.tif Picture no: 13992s.tif Picture no: 13993s.tif

Activate rear win dow wiper and Heated rear window, To defrost misty or icy windows:
wash system: heated exterio r mirrors 3: Turn rotary knob for temperature
Wiper on = Push stalk On = Press and airflow clo ckwise,
forwards Off = Press again air distribution to V;
Wiper off = Pull stalk Air conditioning system 3:
6 Air conditioning see page 117, Press button n ;
towards heated rear w indow see page 119.
steering wheel Electronic Climate Control
system 3:
Washer = Push stalk fully Press button V
forwards an d 6 Climate control see page 117,
hold air conditioning sy stem 3 see page 123,
6 R ear window w ash / wipe system Electronic Clima te C ontrol system 3
see page 104, see page 126.
further information see pages 204, 235.

Pict ure no: 16496s.t if
To set automatic mode of
Electronic Climate Control
system 3 :
Press AUTO button,
set temperature using
left-han d ro tary kno b
6 Electronic C lim ate C ontrol system 3
see page 126.
In Brief 13
Picture no: 15270s.tif Picture no: 14175s.tif
Manual transmissio n: Easytronic 3:
Reverse gear: with v ehicle stationary, N = Idle / start positio n
three seconds after dec lutching pull the o = Drive position
ring up and enga ge g ear.
(c entre position)
If the gear d oes not engage, set the lev er in
+ = Higher gear
neutra l, release the clutc h pedal and
depress again; then repeat gear selection. - = Lower gear
A/M = Switch between
Automatic mode and
Manu al mode
R = Reverse gear
(with selec tor lever lock)
To mov e the selector lever from N to R,
press the button on the lever.
O nly start in N with footbrake applied.
6 Easytronic 3 see page 132.
14 In Brief

Before starting-off, check: To switch on the ignition, only turn the key
z Ty re pressure and tyre cond ition, to position 2.
see pa ges 160, 216. 6 Electronic imm obiliser see page 27,
z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine diesel fuel system see page 170,
com partment, see pages 228 to 235. further inform ation see pages 138, 171.

z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting

and num ber p la tes are free from dirt,
snow and ice and are operational.
z No ob jects are placed in front of the rear
wind ow, on the instrument panel or in
the area in which the airbag s inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
correctly ad justed.
Picture no: 15582a.tif
z Bra ke op eration.
To start engine:
Operate clutc h and brake,
Easytronic 3 in N,
do not accelerate,
Petrol engin es: key to 3;
Diesel engines: key to 2,
wh en control indic ator ! go es
out1) , tu rn key to 3;
release key once engine is
run ning
Before restarting or when switching off the
engine, turn k ey back to p osition 0.

1)
Prehea ting system switches o n only if ou tsid e
temp era ture is lo w.

Pict ure no: 14714s.t if
Releasing th e handbrake:
Raise lever slightly,
press lock bu tto n,
lower lever fully
6 Handbrake see pag e 155.
In Brief 15
6 Further inform ation see pages 27, 138,
radio frequency remote control
see page 28,
central loc king sy stem see page 30,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 see page 34,
vehicle d ecommissioning see page 237.
Pict ure no: 15758t.tif
Parking the vehic le:
Apply handbrake firmly,
switch engine off,
remove key,
loc k steering wheel,
loc k vehicle
To lock vehicle and arm the Vauxhall ala rm
sy stem 3, press button p .
To activate the mechanical anti-theft
lock ing sy stem, p ress b utton p twice.
16 In Brief
Advice wh en parking:
z Do not p ark the v ehicle on flam mable
surfaces as combustion could occur due
to the high ex ha ust temperatures.
z Alwa ys apply the handbrake firmly.
Ap ply the ha ndb ra ke as firmly as
possible on uphill or downhill slopes. To
reduce operating forces, a pply
footbrake at the sa me tim e.
z Close windows, slid ing roof 3 and tilting
roof 3 .
z With manual transmission, select first
gear or reverse gea r. With Easytronic 3,
move selector lever to c entre p osition
before switching ignition off.
z O n vehicles with Easytronic 3, c ontrol
indicator R flashes for a few second s
after the ignition is switched off if the
handbrake has not been applied.
z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to
eng age (anti-theft protection) after first
withdrawing the ignition key.
z The engine cooling fans may run a fter
the engine has been switched off,
see page 227.
6 Further information
see p ages 235, 237.
 In Brief 17

That was the most important

information for your first drive
in your Meriva in brief.

The other pages o f this chapter

con tain a description of some
interesting fun ction s in your
vehicle.

The remain ing ch apters of the

Owners Manual contain
impo rtant information on
operatio n, safety and
maintenance as well as a
com plete in dex.
18 In Brief

Flexible Seat System (FlexSpace)

The rear row of seats in your vehicle offers
three seats or, with the centre seat lowered,
two seats with more seating space. The
outboard seats can be lowered to obtain a
lev el loading surface.

Picture no: 14178s.tif Picture no: 14179s.tif

Move rear outboa rd sea ts
z Pull handle under seat,
z Slide seat,
z Release handle and a llow seat to
eng age in p osition.
The back rests must not be in the rearm ost
position when the seats a re moved ba ck, in
order to prevent d amage.
Ad just or fold b ackrest of outb oard seats
z Pull handle on outb oa rd side of seat,
z Guid e b ackrest into the relevant position,
z Release handle and allow seat to audibly
engage in position.
 In Brief 19

The b ackrest can engage in several

positions. In ad dition, the back rest can be
folded all the w ay down to the sea t cushion
when extend ing the luggage
compartment.

9 Warning
To prevent injuries, a lways hold seat
backrest firmly and guide downwards
when folding .

Picture no: 14728s.tif Picture no: 14729s.tif

Low er c entr e seat
z House centre seat belt in the belt reta iner
in the roof,
z Insert seat belts into recesses in seat
cushion,
z Slide centre rea r seat hea d restraint all
the way d ow n,
z Pull release handle at rear of centre seat
back rest. Tilt back rest forwa rd s a nd
eng age.
Two r ear seat s w ith more seating sp ace
z Lower centre seat,
z Adjust back rest to centre position,
z Pull handle beneath seat.
z Slide seat all the way back , then towards
the centre of the v ehicle and then further
rearwards to the desired position,
z Release handle and allow seat to
engage in position.
20 In Brief
Pict ure no: 14730s.t if
Three seats
z Ad just back rest to centre position,
z Pull handle beneath seat.
z Slide seat all the way forwards, then out
towa rd s the door and then further
forwards to the desired position.
z Release handle and allow seat to
engage in position,
z Raise centre seat.
Picture no: 14716s.tif
Fold ing down out board seats
z Pull seat belt from belt guide on
back rest,
z Fold down outb oa rd rear sea t bac krests,
z To achieve a lev el loading surfa ce, pull
release handle on back of backrest and
push seat down until it latches into
position.
Picture no: 14125s.tif
Airbag system
The airbag system consists of sev eral
sepa ra te systems.
Front airb ag system
The front airbag system will be triggered in
the event of a serious a ccident involving a
fronta l impact a nd form s safety cushions
for the d riv er and front passenger. The
forward m ov ement of the driver and front
passenger is c hecked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head are
thereby substantially reduced.

Pict ure no: 14742s.t if
Sid e a irbag system 3
The side airb ag is trigg ered in the ev ent of
a side-on collision to form a safety cushion
for the driver or front passeng er in the
respective door area. This substantially
red uces the risk of injury to the upper body
and pelvis.
Picture no: 14127s.tif
Curtai n airbag system 3
The curtain airbag system triggers in case
of a side-on collision and provides a safety
barrier in the head a rea on the respective
side of the v ehicle. This reduces the risk of
injury to the head considerably in case of a
side-on collision.
6 Airbag system s see page 67.
In Brief 21
Picture no: 14287j.tif
Active head restraints 3 on front
seats
In the ev ent of a rear-end im pact, the
active head restraints a utomatica lly tilt
forward a little. The head is m ore
effectively supported b y the head restraint
and the danger of injuries caused by
whiplash in the neck area is reduced.
Active head restraints are identified by the
lettering ACTI VE on the head restraint
guide sleev es.
22 In Brief

Pict ure no: 14304s.t if Picture no: 14315s.tif Picture no: 15593t.tif
Travel Assistant 3 Di sm antling the Tr avel Assistant Operating m enu s in the
The Trav el Assistant contains: z Press lower button on the Travel information display 3
z Arm rest, Assistant, Menu op tions are selected using menus
z Tray , z Pull Travel Assistant upwards out of and using the b uttons / four-way button or
z Drink holders. rec esses, the multi-function knob of the I nfotainment
The Trav el Assistant is mounted on the system 3 or the buttons 3 on the steering
z There is a ca rry ing handle on the b ack to
lowered centre seat (see pag e 19). wheel. The respectiv e m enu options are
facilitate tra nsport.
show n on the display.
S elec tion using four-way button:
press four-w ay button at top, bottom , left
or right.
 In Brief 23

Board Computer 19,5 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2
257.0
1
miles
Timer
40 mph

7.0 gals

8 31.0 mpg

Pi cture no: 15559t.tif Picture no: 14034s.tif Picture no: 16719t.tif

Selection using multi-function knob 3:
Rotate and press multi-function knob.
To exit a m enu, turn the multi-function
knob left or right to Ret urn or Main and
select.
To select w ith steering wheel buttons:
Select menu options via the menus and the
buttons.
6 Information disp la y see p age 92.
Trip computer 3
The trip comp uters provide informa tion on
driving da ta , which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronica lly .
Functions:
z Range,
z Instantaneous consumption,
z Distance travelled,
z Average speed,
z Effective consum ption,
z Average consum ption,
z Stop watch.
6 Trip computer see page 99.
24 In Brief
Pict ure no: 14034s.t if
Remote control on steering
wheel 3
The functions of the Infotainment sy stem
and the information display can be
opera ted with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Further information is available in the
Infotainm ent system operating
instructions.
Picture no: 14035s.tif
Twin Audio 3 Parkin g distance sensors 3
Tw in Audio p rov id es rear seat occupants
with the opportunity to listen to a different
audio source tha n the one selected by the
driver on the Infotainment sy stem.
Only a n audio source tha t is not currently
active on the radio system can be
controlled using Twin Audio.
Tw o headp hone connections are a vailable,
with separate volum e c ontrols.
Further inform ation is av ailable in the
Infotainment sy stem opera ting
instructions.
Picture no: 14779s.tif
When rev erse gear is selected, the p arking
distance sensors switch on automatically .
If the v ehicle approaches an obstacle when
reversing, a series of signals can be hea rd
in the vehicle interior. The interv al b etween
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the sig nal will be continuous.
6 Parking dista nce sensors 3
see page 153.

Pictu re no: 15209j.tif
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) 3
AFL im prov es illumina tion of:
z Curves (curve lighting),
z Intersections and tig ht turns
(turn lighting ).
Picture no:
Curve lig hting (1)
The light beam pivots based on steering
wheel position and speed (from ap prox . 6
mph (10 k m/h)).
The head lig hts shine at an a ngle of up to
15 to the right or left of the direction of
tra vel.
In Brief 25
Turn lig hting (2)
An add itional light illuminates at certain
steering wheel setting s (after rota tion of
app rox . 90 ), turn signal settings and
speeds (up to approx. 25 m ph (40 km /h)).
The lig ht beam projects at a 90 angle to
the left or right of the v ehicle up to a
distance of a pprox. 30 metres.
Reverse function
Turning the lights on, selecting reverse
gear selected a nd sw itching on a turn
signal light causes the turn lighting to be
switched on for the respective side.
When the turn signal is sw itc hed off, the
turn lighting continues to illuminate for
app rox . 15 second s.
6 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3
see page 109.
26 Keys, Doors, Windows

Keys, Doors, Windows Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the vehic le
docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3.
The key is a c onstituent of the electronic
immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem -
free op eration of the electronic
immobiliser.
Keep the sp are k ey in a safe plac e.
Replacem ent keys ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 26
Locks, see pa ge 204.
Loc k cylinders . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 26
Ca r Pass... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 26
Loc k cylinders
Key with retractable key blade 3 ..... . 26
Designed to free-wheel if they are
Electronic immobiliser... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 27
forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or Picture no: 15760t.tif
Radio frequency remote control .. ..... . 28 if the correct key is not fully inserted. Key with retractable key blade 3
Central locking system . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 30
To reset, turn cy linder with the c orrect key Press button to extend. Press button to
Fault when locking or unlocking... ..... . 32
until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then retrac t and audibly engage key b la de.
Lug gage compartment .... ..... .... .... ..... . 32
re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels,
Vauxhall alarm system 3. ..... .... .... ..... . 34 turn the key through 180 and rep eat
Child safety locks . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 36 op eration.
Ex terior mirrors..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 37
Interior mirror .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 38 Car Pass
Door windows . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 39 The Ca r Pass contains a ll of the vehicles
Electric windows 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 39 data and should therefore not be k ept in
Sunroof and tilting roof 3 ..... .... .... ..... . 41 the vehicle.
Have your Ca r Pa ss to hand when
consulting a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.

Pi cture no: 15761t.tif
Electronic immo biliser
Using a transponder housed in the key , the
system checks whether the vehicle may be
started using the key that has been
inserted. If the k ey is recognised as
"authorised" the engine can be started.
The electronic imm ob iliser activates
automatically when the k ey is removed
from the starter switch.
The c od e number of the electronic
immobiliser is giv en in the C ar Pass.
Keys, D oors, Windo ws 27
If control indicator A illum inates after the
eng ine is started, there is a fault in the
eng ine electronic s or transmission
electronics 3, (see pages 85, 137, 147), or
there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3,
(see page 230).
Not e
The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
Therefore, alwa ys lock the vehicle before
leaving it unattended and enable Vauxhall
alarm sy stem 3 . See p age 34.
Picture no: 17880s.tif
Control i nd icator for imm obiliser A
Control indica tor A illuminates briefly
when the ig nition is sw itched on.
If the control indicator flashes w hen the
ignition is on, there is a fault in the sy stem;
the engine cannot be started. S witc h off
the ignition and then rep eat the start
attempt.
If the control indicator A continues to
flash, try to start the engine using the spare
key and conta ct a workshop for assistance.
28 Keys, Doors, Windows

Radio frequenc y remote control

Dep ending on equipment level, the vehicle
comes equipped with one of the remote
controls illustrated on this page.
The rad io frequency remote control is
integrated in the key .
Used to op erate:
z Central locking system ,
z Mechanical anti-theft locking system ,
z Vauxhall ala rm system 3 .
In vehicles with electric windows in all
doors 3, the rem ote control can be used to
closed the windows.
Pict ure no: 15330t.tif Picture no: 15331t.tif
The remote control has a ra nge of approx. C entra l lock ing system,
5 metres. This range can be affected by see page 30.
outside influences. Aim the remote control Mechanic al anti -theft locki ng system,
at the v ehicle to op erate. see page 28.
Handle the rem ote control with care, Vauxhall ala rm system 3,
protect it from m oisture and high see page 34.
temperatures and avoid unnecessary
op eration. Electric w indows 3 ,
see page 39.
The haz ard warning lights flash to indicate
that the rem ote control is op erational.

Fault
If the central locking system cannot be
opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e
due to the following :
z The range of the rem ote control has
been ex ceeded.
z Remote control b attery v olta ge is too
low. Battery replac ement - see next
column.
z If the remote control is frequently and
repeatedly operated outside the
recep tion range of the v ehicle (e.g. too
far from vehicle), the remote control will
no longer be recognised . Remote c ontrol
synchronisation, see end colum n.
z If the centra l loc king sy stem is
ov erloaded as a result of repeated
op eration at short interv als. The power
supply is c ut off for a b rief period.
z Interference from higher-power radio
waves from other sources.
To elim inate the cause of a fault, we
recom mend contacting a workshop for
assistance.
O pen drivers door with key, see pa ge 32.
Keys, D oors, Windo ws 29
K ey with fix ed blade,
see Fig. 15331 T on previous page.
Hav e the workshop chang e the battery .
I n t he event of a funct ionality prob lem or
ba ttery r epl acement, synchroni se the
remot e cont rol.
After c hanging the battery , unlock the
door using the key in the driver s lock
cy linder, see page 32. The remote control is
synchronised by inserting the key in the
starter switch.
Pict ure no: 15332t.tif
Rem ote control b attery rep lacement
Replace the battery as soon as the range
of the rem ote control becom es reduced.
Key with retrac ta ble k ey blade,
see Fig. 15330 T on previous pa ge.
Extend key, see pa ge 26. O pen remote
control. Replace battery - b attery type, see
page 218 - noting installation position.
Close remote control.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in accordance with environmental
protection regulations.
30 Keys, Doors, Windows
Pi cture no: 15335t.tif
Cen tral locking system
For doors, luggag e compartment and tank
flap.
To unlock
Press button q on the remote control
or, from the inside
pull up lock button on drivers door.
When the mechanical anti-theft locking
system is enabled, the doors cannot be
unlock ed by pulling up the lock buttons.
Country-specific v ersion 3 :
Pressing once unlock s the drivers door,
and pressing twice unlock s the entire
vehic le.
Pict ure no: 15333t.tif Picture no: 15334t.tif
To lock Mechanic al anti -theft locki ng system
Close doors, luggage compartment and
tank flap. 9 Warnin g
Press button p on the rem ote control
Do not use the system if there are people
or, from the inside in the vehicle! The doors cannot b e
press lock button on driv ers door when the unlocked from inside.
doors are closed.
All the doors must be closed.
Press the p button on the rem ote control
within 10 seconds of locking.
Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
such tha t doors ca nnot be opened.
If the ignition wa s on, the drivers door
must be opened and closed once so that
the vehicle can be secured .

Note
z To prevent the driver from being
inad vertently locked out, the button on
the drivers door cannot b e d epressed
when the d oor is open.
z If the driv ers door is not closed properly ,
the central lock ing sy stem will unlock
again immediately after locking.
z Ap prox . 30 seconds after unloc king
using the remote control, the doors lock
again automatically if no door is
op ened.
z To lock the doors from inside (e. g. to
prevent unwa nted entry from outside),
press lock button on d riv ers door when
Closing w indows 3 from outside
the doors are closed.
z Locked doors unlock automatically if an
accident of a certain sev erity occurs (to
permit outsid e assistance). Prerequisite:
Ignition must not be switched off.
Hold button p on the remote c ontrol
Picture no: 17899s.tif
9 Warning
Exercise care when operating electric
windows. Risk of injury , especially for
children.
Vehicle passeng ers must be informed
accordingly.
K eep a close watch on the windows when
closing them. Ensure that nothing
becomes trapped in them as they move.
Keys, D oors, Windo ws 31
O n vehicles with electric windows in all
doors 3, the windows can be closed from
outside:
depressed until all of the wind ow s hav e
closed completely.
Further information on electric windows,
see page 39.
Fault
If the central locking cannot be operated,
this can be for one of the following reasons:
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
supply is cut off for a brief period .
z Defec tiv e fuse in fusebox, see page 188.
To elimina te the cause of a fault, w e
recommend contac ting a workshop for
assistance.
O perate drivers door with key , see nex t
pag e.
32 Keys, Doors, Windows
Pict ure no: 17881s.t if
Fault when lo cking or u nloc king
Fault in remot e c ontrol
To unlock
Turn key clockwise in d riv ers door lock,
return to the v ertical position and rem ov e.
The entire vehicle is unloc ked. Sw itc h on the
ignition to deactiv ate the Vaux hall alarm
system 3.
To lock
With the drivers door closed, turn the k ey
anticlockwise in the lock, return to the
vertic al position and remove. The entire
vehic le is locked.
Malfuncti on i n cent ral lock ing syst em
To unlock
Turn key c lock wise in drivers door lock,
return to the vertical position and remove.
The drivers door is unlocked. The other
doors can b e unlocked by pulling up the
interior lock buttons (not possible if the
mechanical a nti-theft locking system is
enabled). Switch on the ignition to
deactiv ate the Vaux ha ll alarm system 3.
To lock
With the drivers door open, press the
interior lock button of the other doors.
Close the drivers door. Turn the key
anticlock wise in the lock, return to the
Picture no: 15335t.tif
vertical position and remove. The tank flap
cannot be locked if there is a ma lfunction in Luggage com partment
the central lock ing sy stem. To unlock
Press button q on the remote control. The
Note luggage compa rtm ent is unlock ed
z The mechanical a nti-theft locking together with the d oors and the tank flap.
system and the Vauxhall alarm system 3
cannot be activated with the key . C ountry-specific v ersion 3:
Press button q twice on the remote
z To deactivate the Vauxhall alarm control; one press unlocks the drivers door,
system 3 after opening a d oor, switch on two presses unlocks the entire vehicle.
the ig nition.
z To elim ina te the cause of a fault, we
rec om mend contacting a workshop for
assistance.
 Keys, D oors, Windo ws 33

Pict ure no: 17873s.t if Picture no: 17882s.tif Picture no: 15333t.tif
To open To close To lock
The lugga ge com partment is opened by There a re two handles on the inside of the Press button p on remote control.
opera ting the unlock ing button b eneath tailg ate for closing the luggage
the handle. compartment.

9 Warning Do not operate the unloc king button

beneath the handle when closing.
Otherwise the luggage compa rtm ent will
Do not d riv e with the luggage
once again b e unlocked .
com partment open or ajar, e.g. when
transporting bulky objects, since toxic
exhaust gas c ould penetrate the interior.

Fitting of a ccessories on the tailgate will

increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy ,
it will then not stay op en.
34 Keys, Doors, Windows

Vauxhall alarm system 3

Monitors:
z The doors, lug gage compartment,
bonnet,
z The passenger c om partment,
z Vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,
z The ignition.

Pict ure no: 15334t.tif Picture no: 11575s.tif

To activ ate
All doors, windows, sunroof 3, tilting roof 3
and the bonnet must b e closed.
Press button p on the rem ote control to
activate the Vauxhall alarm system and
lock the d oors.
If the ignition wa s switched on, the drivers
door must b e opened a nd closed once so
that the anti-theft alarm system can be
switched on.
Act ivat ion without monitoring of
pa ssenger comp artment or vehicle tilt
E.g., if anim als a re to be left in the v ehicle.
1. Close luggage comp artm ent and
bonnet.
2. Press button in front of the c ourtesy light
(with ig nition off); LED in the haz ard
warning light button flashes for a
maxim um of 10 seconds.
3. Close doors.
4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system . LED
illuminates. After approx . 10 second s,
the anti-theft alarm sy stem is activated
without monitoring of the passenger
compartment or vehicle tilt. The LED
fla shes until the system is switched off.
 Keys, D oors, Windo ws 35

After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft

alarm system activation:
z LED flashes
slow ly = Sy stem switched on,
z LED illuminates
for approx.
1 second = Switch-off function.

If a system fa ult occ urs, contact a

work shop for assistance.

Pict ure no: 14046s.t if Picture no: 15335t.tif

Light emit ting d iode (LED) To deact ivat e
During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft Press button q on remote control unit
alarm system activation: or
turn on ignition.
z LED comes on = Test, switc h-on delay,
z LED flashes If there is a fault in the remote control,
quick ly unlock vehicle as describ ed on p age 32.
= Door, lugg age
com partment or If the alarm is triggered w hen the driv ers
bonnet open, or door is opened, d eactivate the anti-theft
system fault. alarm sy stem by sw itc hing on the ignition.
36 Keys, Doors, Windows
Note
z Changes to the vehicle interior, such as
the use of seat c ov ers, could impa ir the
function of passeng er comp artm ent
monitoring.
Alar m
An alarm c an be trigg ered when the
anti-theft alarm system is switched on,
indicated by:
z An a coustic signal (horn) and
z A visual signal (hazard warning lig hts).
The number of alarms and the duration
thereof are stipulated by law.
The a la rm can be silenced by pressing
button q on the remote control or b y
switching on the ignition. The anti-theft
alarm system is dea ctiv ated at the same
time.
Alarm sir en
with int eg rated ba ttery 3
The alarm siren monitors the on-board
voltage network and triggers an alarm if
this network is m anip ulated (e.g. if the
vehicles battery is d isconnected by
unauthorised persons). The alarm siren has
its own power sup ply and is therefore not
dependent on the vehicles battery.
If the v ehicles ba ttery is to be
disconnected (e. g. for maintenance work),
the alarm siren must be deactivated as
follows: switch the ignition on then off,
disconnect the vehic les battery within
15 seconds.
Picture no: 16102s.tif
To sw itch off al arm siren: Child safety locks
Switch ignition on then off.
9 Warnin g
Use the child safety lock whenever
child ren are occupying the rear seats.
Disregard of these instruc tions may lead
to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle
passeng ers must be informed
accordingly.
Turn rota ry knob in each rea r door loc k
from v ertical position using the ignition key:
Door cannot be opened from the inside.

Pict ure no: 13985s.t if
Exterio r mirrors
Manual
From the inside, move the handle in the
appropriate direction.
Picture no: 16099s.tif
Electri c 3
Four-way switch in drivers door.
Move rock er switch located above the
four-way switch to the left or right:
Four-way switch controls c orresponding
mirror.
Asp heri cal ext eri or mirror 3
Increases the field of view. Estima ting the
distance away from vehicles following you
is only possible to a limited extent because
of slight distortion.
Keys, D oors, Windo ws 37
Picture no: 15279s.tif
Sw ing-in exter ior mirror s
Manually: Press lightly.
Electrically: Press b utton. The mirrors
swing-in to their respective end positions.
If a mirror has b een manually adjusted,
swing-in both mirrors by hand and then
press the button.
After electrical op eration, there is a
6-second delay before the mirrors can
be opera ted a gain.
38 Keys, Doors, Windows
Pict ure no: 14138s.t if
For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior
mirrors will swing out of their normal
mounting p osition if they are bumped with
sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by
apply ing slight pressure to the mirror
housing.
Picture no: 14300s.tif
In terior mirror
To adjust, swivel mirror housing.
Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing
to reduce dazzle at night.
Picture no: 13984s.tif
Autom atic anti-da zzle interior mi rror 3
Dazz le at night is automatically reduced.
The mirror does not reduce dazzle when:
z The ignition is switched off,
z Reverse gear is engag ed or the selec tor
lever is set to R,
z Interior lighting ha s b een switched on.
 Keys, D oors, Windo ws 39

Electric win dows 3

9 Warning
Take care when operating the electric
windows 3. Risk of injury, espec ia lly for
children. Inform vehicle occupants.
If there are children occupy ing the rea r
seats, switch on child safety sy stem for
rea r windows 3, see nex t page.
K eep a close watch on the windows when
closing them. Ensure that nothing
becomes trapped in them as they move.

Pict ure no: 14137s.t if Operable when the ig nition key is in
Doo r win dows position 1 (see p age 9).
The d oor w indows can be operated with
Button illumination indica tes operational
the c ra nk .
readiness.
Operational readiness ends when the
drivers door is opened.
Operated with two or four cross switches in
drivers door armrest: top cross switc hes for
drivers and front passenger s d oor
wind ow s, and bottom cross switches 3 for
the rea r windows.
There a re also cross switches in the front
passengers door arm rest and in the rear
door armrests 3.
Picture no: 14804s.tif
To operate window in stages, tap
app ropriate switch.
For autom atic opening or closing, keep
switch pressed for slightly longer.
To stop window mov ement, tap switch
aga in.
Sa fet y functi on
If the window glass encounters resistance
abov e the middle of the window d uring
automatic c losing, it is imm ediately
stopped and the w indow opened again.
If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on
acc ount of frost), repeatedly tap the switch
for the a ppropriate window until the
window has been closed in stages.
40 Keys, Doors, Windows
Pict ure no: 14140s.t if
Chil d safety syst em for rear wi nd ows 3
Switch b etween the rock er switches in the
armrest on the driver s d oor:
z To the left (red control indicator visible):
Rear windows cannot be operated with
the rocker buttons in the rear doors,
z To the right (green control indicator
visible): Rear windows can be operated
with the rocker b uttons in the rear doors.
Picture no: 17899s.tif
Closing w indows from out si de 3
On vehicles with electric windows in all
doors, the windows can be closed from
outside:
Hold button p on the remote control until
all of the windows have closed com pletely .
O verload
If the windows a re repeatedly operated at
short intervals, the power sup ply is briefly
cut off.
The sy stem is protected by fuses in the
fusebox, see page 186.
Fault
The wind ow s c annot be automatically
opened or closed.
Activate electric windows as follows:
1. Close doors.
2. Switch on ignition.
3. Open window completely .
4. Close window a nd hold down rocker
switch for at least another 5 seconds.
5. Repeat for ea ch window.
 Keys, D oors, Windo ws 41

To op en:
Press button l , sunroof opens.
To stop the movement, press button ag ain.
To close
Press button \ until the sunroof is closed.
To ra ise
With the sunroof closed , press button \
until sunroof is open.
To low er
Press button l until the sunroof is closed.

Pict ure no: 14251s.t if Picture no: 14143s.tif

Sunroo f and tilting roof 3 Rear t ilting roof
Right rocker switch \ and w b etween the
9 Warning sunv isors. O pera ble when the ignition is on.
To raise
Ta ke care when opera ting sunroof 3 and Press button \ until tilting roof has been
tilting roof 3. Risk of injury , especially for
raised.
children. Vehicle oc cup ants must be
informed accordingly. To lower
Press b utton w until tilting roof has closed.
Keep a close watch on the sliding roof
when closing it. Ensure that nothing
becomes trapped in it as it moves.

Front sliding roof

Left rocker sw itch l a nd \ between the
sunvisors. O perable when the ignition is on.
42 Keys, Doors, Windows

Sunshade
To reduce the sunlight in the vehicle interior
with the sliding roof closed or raised.
O pen or close sunshade as req uired.
When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade
is also op ened.
Note
z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof,
allow water to run off and then op en
roof.
z When using a roof rack, check the
clearance of the sunroof, to av oid
damage.
Picture no: 14802s.tif Picture no: 14803s.tif
Fault Press the sprung central pa rt of the drive
If the electric d riv e fails, the sy stem is shaft in as fa r as possible with a
protected by a fuse in the fusebox see screwd riv er 3 and turn the driveshaft until
page 186. Until the fault is rem edied, the sunroof or tilting roof is closed.
op erate the sunroof as follow s:
Push drive cover backwards.
 Seats, Interior 43

Seats, Interior

Front sea ts .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 43
Head restraints .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 45
Armrest 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 47
Travel Assistant 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 47
Rear seats.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 50
Flexible Seat S ystem (Flex Space). ..... . 51
Lug gage compartment extension .... . 52
Lug gage compartment cover 3... ..... . 54
Safety net 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 55
Lashing eyes 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 56
Bag hangers 3 ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 56 Picture no: 13977s.tif Picture no: 13978s.tif
Notes on loading the vehic le .... .... ..... . 56 Front seats Ad just ing the bac krest
To adjust, turn hand wheel on outboard
Three-stage safety sy stem.... .... .... ..... .
Three-point seat belts .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .
58
58
9 Warning side of seat while releasing the load on the
bac krest.
Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 60 Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than
Using the belts ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 62 Move seat backrest to suit seating position.
10 inches (25 cm) from the steering
Mounting brackets 3 for ISO -FIX child wheel, to perm it safe airba g deploy ment.
restra int system s ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 64
Never adjust the seat while driving.
Child restraint systems 3 . ..... .... .... ..... . 65 It could mov e in an uncontrolled manner
Airbag system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 67 when the handle is pulled.
Ciga rette lig hter 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 79
Accessory sockets 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 79 Adjust seat longi tudinally
Ashtray s .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 80 To adjust, p ull the handle on the front seat,
Fold away ta bles 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 82 slide the seat and release the handle.
Stowage comp artm ents... ..... .... .... ..... . 81
Coin holder .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 83
Sunvisors.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 83
44 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 13979s.t if
Adj usti ng the seat hei ght
To adjust, pull lever up and reliev e the load
on the sea t cushion, or press the seat
cushion down with y our b od y weight.
Never adjust d riv ers seat height while the
vehic le is in motion. Uncontrolled
adjustm ents could occur when the lever is
pulled.
Picture no: 16098s.tif
Adjusting t he lum bar supp ort 3
To adjust, turn side handw heel on
outboard side of seat while relieving the
loa d on the ba ckrest.
Ad just lumbar support to suit p ersonal
requirements.
Picture no: 14100s.tif
Seat position
Adjust drivers sea t such that with the
driver sitting upright, the steering w heel is
held in the area of its upper spokes with the
drivers arms slig htly bent.
Push front passeng ers seat as far bac k as
possible.

The seat backrests must not be tilted too
far back . Recommend ed m aximum tilting
angle approx. 25.
9 Warning
Failure to ob serve these descriptions
could lead to injuries which could be
fata l. Vehicle p assengers must b e
informed accordingly b efore starting-off.
Picture no: 13980s.tif
Head restraints
Adjusting t he front head rest raints and
the rea r outboard head rest raints 3
To adjust head restraint, tilt forward, hold
and adjust height.
To fold ov er the rear seats or lower the
front passenger s seat head restra int a ll
the way down and remove, see next page.
Seats, Interior 45
Picture no: 14102s.tif
Ad just ing the rear centre head restraint
To adjust, pull hea d restraint upwards,
press spring s a nd push head restraint
down.
To improve visibility, push hea d restraint
down as far a s p ossible if centre sea t is
unoccupied or to increase the size of the
luggage compa rtm ent.
Fold centre seat see page 53.
If c entre sea t is occ upied, pull head
restraint upwards.
46 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 14101s.t if
Head restrai nt position
The midd le of the head restraint should be
at eye lev el. I f this is not possible for
extremely tall persons, set to highest
position, and set to lowest position for
small persons.
9 Warning
Failure to ob serve the descriptions can
lead to injuries which could be fatal.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
according ly before moving a way.
Picture no: 14287j.tif
Activ e head restra ints 3
In the event of a rear-end impact, the
active head restraints automatically tilt
forward a little. The hea d is more
effectively sup ported by the head restraint
and the da ng er of injuries caused by
whip la sh in the neck area is reduced.
Ac tiv e hea d restra ints are identified by the
lettering AC TIVE on the head restra int
guid e sleeves.
Picture no: 11581s.tif
Remov ing the head restraint s
Press and release the two catches.
Pull and remove the hea d restraint.
Not e
O nly approved objects or com ponents
should be attached to the head restraint of
the unoccupied front passengers seat.

Pict ure no: 14738s.t if
Armrest 3
Arm rest a t driv er s seat
Push raised armrest back wards against
resista nce and fold down.
The a rm rest can be moved to different
positions in stag es by lifting it.
Seats, Interior 47
Picture no: 14304s.tif Picture no: 14310s.tif
Travel Assistant 3 I nsta lling The Travel Assistant
The Travel Assista nt c ontains: Lower the centre seat see page 53.
z Armrest, Insert Travel Assistant in rear recesses on
z Tray, bac k of centre seat.
z Drink holders.
The Travel Assista nt is mounted on the
low ered centre seat (see page 53).
48 Seats, Interior

Pict ure no: 14311s.t if Picture no: 14312s.tif
Fold Travel Assistant down a nd audibly Armrest
enga ge in front recesses. The armrest c an be moved and therefore
adapted to the p osition of the outboard
9 Warning seats.
Picture no: 14313s.tif
Tray
There is a tray beneath the armrest.
O pen tray by pushing upper button.

If it is not c orrectly eng aged, the Trav el

Assistant can b e propelled forward with
considerab le force if hard braking occ urs,
possibly ca using injury .
 Seats, Interior 49

Pict ure no: 14314s.t if Picture no: 14315s.tif Picture no: 14316s.tif
Drink hol ders Di sm antling the Tr avel Assistant Pull Travel Assistant upwa rd s out of
O pen drink holder on front by pressing Press lower b utton on the Travel Assistant. recesses.
front fac e. There is a carrying handle on the b ack to
facilitate transport.
It is not necessary to remov e the Tra vel
Assistant if you wish to raise the c entre
seat, howev er, the armrest must be pushed
forwards. Be careful of any items in the
Travel Assistant.
50 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 14178s.t if
Rear seats
Mov e rear out board seats
Pull ha ndle under sea t, move seat, release
handle and allow seat to engage.
The b ackrests must not be in the rearmost
position when the seats are moved back, in
order to prevent damag e.
The seat back rest engages in severa l
positions.
9 Warnin g
To prevent injuries, always hold seat
backrest firmly and guide downwards
when folding.
To extend the luggage compartment, the
seat can be swiv elled down. However, we
recommend always using the seat for
sitting only when in the swiv elled -up
position. To extend the lugga ge
compa rtm ent, see pag e 52.
Picture no: 14179s.tif
Adjusting b ackr ests of rear
out board seats
Get hold of bac krest, pull handle at
outboard side of seat and guid e b ackrest
into the relevant position. Relea se handle
and allow back rest to engag e.
 Seats, Interior 51

Flexible Seat System (FlexSpace)

In the rear row of seats, your vehicle offers
either three seats or two seats with more
seating room, in this case the centre seat
must be folded down. The outboard seat
back rests ca n be swivelled downwards to
increase the size of the luggage
compartment.

Picture no: 14729s.tif Picture no: 14730s.tif

Tw o rear sea ts with m ore seat ing space
Lower centre seat see page 53.
Move backrest to centre position, pull
ha ndle beneath seat, slide seat back wards
as fa r as possible, then slide inwards to
centre of v ehicle and further back into the
desired position.
Release handle and allow seat to engage
in position.
Three seats
Move bac krest to centre position, pull
handle beneath seat, slide seat forwards to
the stop, then slide out towards door and
further forward into the desired position.
Release ha ndle and a llow seat to eng age
in position.
Raise centre seat see pa ge 53.
52 Seats, Interior

Luggage co mpartment extension

To increase the size of the luggage
compartment, you ca n:
z Fold down the outb oa rd rear seat
backrests,
z Lower the centre seat,
z Swivel down the outboard seats,
z Fold down the front p assengers seat
backrest 3 .
See following pag es for instructions.
The rear seats must be in the outboard
positions, see "Three seats" on the previous
page.
Picture no: 14184s.tif Picture no: 14182s.tif
Fold down outb oa rd rear seat b ackrest Hold the back rest, pull handle at outboard
If necessary, remove luggage side of seat and fold ba ckrest down onto
compartment cov er 3 see pag e 54. seat cushion. Release handle and eng age
bac krest.
Push head restra ints down fully -
see p ages 4, 45.
9 Warnin g
Ta ke seat belt out of the belt guide on the
backrest. To prevent injuries, always hold seat
Remove the push-in sleeves 3 for m ounting backrest firmly and guide downwards
the IS O-FIX child restraint sy stem see when folding.
separate instructions for the IS O-FIX child
restra int system . To raise, pull hand le on outboard side of
the seat and raise seat back rest. Release
handle and latch.
Insert seat belt into belt guide on bac krest.

Pict ure no: 14728s.t if
Lower centre seat
House centre seat belt in the holder in the
roof see page 63.
Insert seat belts into recesses in seat
cushions.
Push centre head restraint as far down as it
will go see page 45.
Pull release handle at rear of c entre
back rest see illustration. Tilt back rest
forward and engage.
9 Warning
Loads must not obstruct the operation of
the handbrake and the gears. Pay
attention to notes on pa ge 56.
Seats, Interior 53
Ra ise outb oard seats
Pull release handle on back of b ackrest
and p ull seat upwards until it engages.
Pull handle on outboard side of rear sea t
and m ove rear seat backrest upright.
Release ha ndle and la tc h into position.
Insert seat belt into belt guide on bac krest.
The seat back rests ca n be righted even
with the seat swivelled bac k. We
recommend only using the seat for sitting
while in the swivelled-up position.
Picture no: 14716s.tif
Raise cent re seat
Pull release handle, m ove ba ckrest up rig ht
and engag e. Outboard seats must be in
the outer position to do this see rig ht-
ha nd colum n on page 51.
Fold ing down out board seats
Push front sea ts forwards or rem ove head
restra ints on the rear outboard seats
see p age 46.
Fold d own outboard rear seat backrests.
To achieve a level loading surface, pull
relea se handle on ba ck of back rest and
push seat down until it latches into
position.
54 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 14107S.tif Picture no: 14735S.t if Picture no: 15272s.tif

Folding d own the front pa ssengers Luggage compartment cover 3 Remov ing
sea t 3 To op en: O pen cov er, d iseng age towa rd s the rear
Push front passengers seat hea d restraint Lift c ov er at rea r and tilt forwa rds, segment and remove from above.
all the way down or remove by seg ment. Fitti ng
see pages 4, 45, 46.
To close: Insert the cover from the rea r, clip into
Push front passengers seat backwards. Tilt top p art of cover ba ckwards and latch place and fold back.
Raise release lever and fold front into position.
passengers sea t forwa rd s. Do not p lace any heav y or sharp-edged
Rai se front p assengers sea t bac krest 3 ob jects on the cover.
Raise release lever, lift front passeng ers
seat a nd audibly engage backrest into
position.
Notes on load ing
See page 56.

Pict ure no: 14736s.t if
Safety net 3 Hook tension straps into lashing eyes 3 or
The safety net is installed behind the front
seats with the rear seat backrests fold ed
forward.
Passeng ers m ust not be carried behind the
safety net.
Fitting
Fold all rea r seat back rests forwards see
luggage comp artment extension, p age 52.
The roof frame contains two m ounting
openings: O pen c ov ers.
Hang the upper net rod first in one
aperture and then in the other side; clip in
place by pushing rod forwa rds into smaller
aperture.
Picture no: 17952S.t if
slots 3 at the rea r of the outer front seat
bracket and tension.
On the version without lashing ey es, when
the sa fety net is mounted for the first time,
the slots at the rear of the outer front seat
bracket must first be opened:
Press the marked field at the upper edge
with a blunt object a nd fold inw ards.
Rem oving
Tilt belt leng th adjuster up wards and
unhook belts. Unhook top net rods and
close two mounting openings.
Seats, Interior 55
Picture no: 16145s.tif
St owage of safety net
Roll up the removed safety net and secure
it with Velcro strips.
S tore the safety net under the floor in the
luggage compa rtm ent. To open, rem ove
the lugg age compartment cov er 3 , see
pag e 54, lift the floor covering by the
handle and raise towards the front, see
pag e 176. Store safety net in front
recesses.
56 Seats, Interior

Pict ure no: 14718s.t if
Lashing eyes 3
The lashing ey es in the lugg age
compartment are for securing transported
item s to p revent them from slipping
around .
Picture no: 14717s.tif
Bag hangers 3
There a re two retainers on the back of the
outer rear seat backrests for hanging
carrier bag s on. Maximum load : 10 kg per
retainer.
Picture no: 14110s.tif
Notes on lo ading the vehicle
z Heav y objects in the luggage
compartment should be placed as far
forwa rd as possible ag ainst the enga ged
rear sea t backrests or, if the rear sea t
backrests are fold ed d ow n, against the
front seat backrests. If objects are to b e
stack ed, the hea vier objects should be
placed at the bottom. Unsecured objects
in the luggage compa rtm ent would be
thrown forward w ith g reat force in the
event of heavy braking, for exam ple.

z Secure heav y objec ts with lashing
straps 3 atta ched to lashing ey es 3
see page 56. If heavy loads slip when the
vehicle is braked heavily or driven
around a bend, the handling of the
vehicle may chang e.
z When transporting ob jects with rear seat
backrests tilted forward, fit safety net
see pa ge 55.
z Close the luggage compartment cover 3
so the rear window does not reflect the
ob jects.
z If the bac krests are not folded down
when transporting objects in the
lugga ge c om partment, they m ust be
engaged in an upright position -
see pa ge 53.
z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e
the upp er edge of the rear seat
back rests, or above the upper ed ge of
the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat
back rests a re folded down.
z The warning triangle 3 a nd first-aid k it
(cushion) 3 m ust alway s be freely
accessible.
z Do not place any objects in front of the
rea r window or on the instrument pa nel.
They are reflected in the glass, obstruct
the drivers view and will be thrown
through the vehicle, for insta nce in the
event of heavy b ra king.
z O bjects must not be stored in the airbag
inflation area, beca use they could cause
injury if the a irba g infla tes.
Seats, Interior 57
z Loads must not obstruct the opera tion of
the pedals, the handbrak e or the gears,
or restric t the drivers freedom of
movement. Do not place loose objects in
the vehicle interior.
z Do not drive with lugga ge compa rtm ent
open when tra nsporting bulky objects,
for exam ple, since toxic exhaust fumes
could penetra te the interior.
z Weights, payload and roof loa d
see page 214.
z A roof load increases the sensitivity of
the vehicle to crossw inds and impairs
vehicle handling due to the vehicles
hig her centre of gravity. Driving with a
roof load - see pages 138, 141, 163.
9 Warnin g
Failure to observe these descriptions can
lead to injuries which ma y be fatal.
Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed
accordingly.
58 Seats, Interior
Three-stage safety system
Com prising:
z Three-point seat belts,
z Belt tensioners at the front seats,
z Airbag sy stems for the drivers seat and
front passenger s sea t 3 as well as the
outboard rear seats 3.
The three stages are activated in sequence
depending on the sev erity of the accident:
z The automatic seat belt locking d evices
prevent the belt strap from b eing pulled
out and thus ensure that the vehicle
occ upa nts are retained in their seats.
z The front seat belts are pulled down at
the belt buckles. This mea ns the b elts fit
snugly, the occupants are d ecelerated
early with the vehic le and the stress
placed on the body is reduced .
z The airbag systems are also triggered in
the event of severe a ccidents a nd form a
safety cushion for the occupa nts.
9 Warning
The airb ag systems serve to supplement
the three-point seat b elts and belt
tensioners. The seat b elts must therefore
alway s be w orn. Disreg ard of these
instructions m ay lead to injuries or
end ang er life. Vehicle p assengers must
be inform ed a ccord ingly .
Alw ays read the instructions prov ided w ith
the child restraint system!
Picture no: 13982.tif
Three-point seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with three-point
seat belts with automatic retrac tors and
locking d evices, allowing freedom of body
mov ement although the spring tensioned
belts always ensure a snug fit.
For information on correct seating
position see pages 44, 62, 68.
The belt has a " vehicle sensitive retra ctor"
which is designed to lock during hea vy
acc eleration or deceleration in any
direction.
 Seats, Interior 59

Belt force limi ter s Testing the belts

9 Warning Belt forc e limiters on the front seats reduce C heck a ll parts of the belt sy stem
the body load, due to dam ped release of period ically for dam age and correct
Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that the belt on a collision. This m eans that the functioning. R eplace dam aged
means a lso in urban traffic a nd when you seat occupants move forwa rd und er components. After an accident, have the
are a rear sea t passeng er. I t can save control. belts and triggered belt tensioners
your life! replaced by a workshop.
Also, pregnant women must alwa ys wear Do not perform any altera tions on the
a seat belt see pa ge 62. belts, their anchorages, the automatic
retrac tors or the belt buck les.
In the event of an accident, persons not Mak e sure that b elts are not da maged or
wearing seat belts endanger their fellow
trapped by sharp-edged objec ts.
occupants and themselv es.
Control indicator X for the seat belt
see page 84.
Seat belts are designed to be used by only
one person at a time. They are not suitable
for anyone under 12 y ears of age or
150 cm .
For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e
recom mend the Vaux hall child restraint
system see page 65.
60 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 14719s.t if
Belt tension ers
The front seat belt systems are eq uipped
with belt tensioners. In the event of a head -
on or rear-end collision of a c ertain
severity, the belt buc kles are pulled down,
thus tightening the belts.
Actua tion of belt t ensioners
Indicated by illum ination of control
indicator v, see nex t colum n.
If the belt tensioners are triggered, they
must be replaced by a workshop.
9 Warnin g
Eliminate the cause of the fault
immediately by a workshop.
S elf-diagnosis integrated into the system
allows rapid fault identification.
Picture no: 17885s.tif
Control i nd icator v for bel t tensioners
The func tion of the belt tensioners and
airbag systems is monitored electronically
and indicated by the control indicator v.
When the ignition is turned on, the control
indica tor illum inates for approx. 4 seconds.
If it does not illum inate, or if it does not go
out after 4 seconds, or if it illuminates while
driving, there is a fault in the belt tensioner
or airbag systems, see pa ge 72. The
sy stems might not trig ger in the ev ent of an
accident.
Deploym ent of the belt tensioners is
indica ted b y continuous illum ination of v.

Im portant
z Do not fit ac cessories not spec ifically
released for your vehicle type or store
ob jects in the belt tensioner operating
area (in the area of the belt tensioners)
due to the risk of injury in the event the
belt tensioners are trigg ered.
z Do not m ake any modifications to the
com ponents of the belt tensioners, a s
this will render the vehicle unroadworthy .
9 Warning
Inc orrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting
of seat belts or belt buckles) can trigg er
the belt tensioners; risk of injury.
z The belt tensioner and airbag system
control electronics can be found in the
centre console area . In order to avoid
malfunctions, d o not store magnetic
objec ts in this area.
z When using the rea r seats, ensure that
the front seat b elt comp onents are not
dam aged by shoes or other objects.
Avoid dirt getting into the belt retractors.
Seats, Interior 61
z We recom mend that you have the front
seats removed by a w orkshop in the
event of actuation of the belt tensioners.
z The belt tensioners trigger once only,
ind ic ated b y the illumination of control
ind ic ator v. Have a work shop replace
trig gered belt tensioners.
z When disposing of the vehicle, the sa fety
instructions given for this must be
observed . Ta ke the vehicle to a recycling
company for disposal.
62 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 14120s.t if
Using the belts
Fitting seat bel ts
Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide
it across the body , making certain that it is
not twisted.
Insert the la tch plate into the buckle. The
front sea t b ackrest must not be tilted back
too far or the seat belt will not op erate
properly . The recommended angle of
inclina tion is 25 .
Make sure that the lap belt is not twisted
and that it fits snugly across the body.
Tension the belt freq uently while driving b y
tugging the diagona l part of the b elt.
Picture no: 14121s.tif Picture no: 14122s.tif
Height adjustm ent
9 Warning For height adjustment of the upper guiding
point of the front seat belts:
O n pregna nt women in particular, the lap
belt must be positioned a s low as 1. Pull b elt out slig htly.
possible across the pelvis so as not to put 2. Push button on sliding adjuster.
too much pressure on the abdomen.
3. Set desired height.
Bulk y clothing prevents the belt from fitting 4. Allow sliding ad juster to a ud ib ly latch.
prop erly. The belt must not rest against Do not adjust height while driving .
ha rd or fragile objects in the pockets of
your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys,
spectacles) because these could cause
injury. Do not place any objec ts (e.g.
ha ndb ags, mobile phones) b etween the
belt and your body.

Pict ure no: 13982s.t if
Adjust height such that the belt p asses
over the wearers shoulder and rests
against the shoulder. It must not pass over
the neck or upper arm.
Picture no: 14123s.tif
Rem oving t he b el t
To remove the belt, d epress the red
pushbutton on the buckle; the b elt will
retract automatically.
Seats, Interior 63
Picture no: 14124S.tif
Three- point seat belt on c entr e rear seat
Pull latch p la tes out of belt retainer in roof.
C lic k bottom latch plate into right-hand
buckle (1) on centre seat. Rem ov e top latch
plate from reta iner, guide over shoulder
and la p area with belt (d o not twist) and
click into left buckle (2) on centre seat.
If using the centre seat, both outb oa rd
seats must be pushed back wards and the
bac krests must be flush with the centre
seat backrest, see p age 51.
6
64 Seats, Interior

Mounting brackets 3 for ISO-FIX

child restraint systems
The brackets located between the backrest
and seat cushion are used for mounting
IS O-FIX child restraint sy stems.
Plea se follow the instructions
acc om panying the I SO -FIX child restraint
system.
O nly ISO -FIX child restraint sy stems
app rov ed for the vehicle may be used.

Picture no: 14739S.tif Picture no: 14740S.t if

To remove the b elt, press the button on the Insert in the belt retainer in the roof with the
left sid e of the buck le (2). If the central seat low er latch plate pointing forw ards.
is to be lowered, press the button on the
right side of the buckle (1). The belt retrac ts
automatically.
Push the upper latch p late into the holder
for the lower latch plate. Fold over lock ed
together latch plates ag ainst the belt.
 Seats, Interior 65

Child restraint systems 3 Perm issib le options for fitt ing a chil d safety seat1 )
When using a child restraint sy stem, follow
the instructions for installation and use. Weight On On On
and front outboa rd rear seats centre rear seat
The c ountry in which y ou a re travelling age class 2) passeng er s seat
may not perm it the use of child restraint
systems on certain seats. Alw ays comply 0:
with the local or na tional regulations. up to 10 k g
or approx.
Selecting the right system 10 months B1 , + U, + U, + +
Your child should travel fa cing backwa rd s
in the v ehicle for a s long a s p ossible. 0+ :
up to 13 k g
A child has a v ery weak cerv ic al sp inal or approx.
column and in the event of an accident is 2 years
less likely to suffer injury in a rearward -
facing, sem i-lying position than if seated I:
upright. 9 t o 18 kg B2 , + U, + U, + +
or approx.
9 Warning 8 months to
4 years
Nev er carry child restraint sy stems on
II:
your lap, risk of fatal injury.
15 to 25 kg
or approx.
3 to 7 y ears X U U, + +
III :
22 to 36 kg
or approx.
6 to 12 years

1)
For rea son s of safety, we recomm end tha t the ch ild safety sea t b e insta lled on
on e of the ou ter rea r sea ts .
2)
We recom mend th e u se of each system until the child rea ch es th e u pp er w eig ht limit.
66 Seats, Interior
B 1 = Conditiona l, without front
passengers airbags or with sea t
occupancy recognition and
Va ux ha ll child restraint systems with
transponders.
The front passeng ers seat m ust
also have a height adjusting facility:
Move to highest position, slide front
passengers seat all the way back
and move front passeng ers seat
belt anc horage point to lowest
possible position.
B 2 = Conditiona l, without side airbag
with front pa ssengers seat slid all
the wa y back , or with seat
occupancy recognition and
Va ux ha ll child restraint systems with
transponders.
The front passeng ers seat m ust
also have a height adjusting facility:
Move to highest position and slide
front pa ssengers seat all the way
back so that the seat belt runs
towards the front from the
anchorag e point.
U = For universal use in com bination
with three-p oint seat belt.
+ = Vehicle seat av ailable with ISO -FIX
fixings. When using ISO -FI X, only
I SO-FIX child restraint systems
a pproved for the vehicle ma y be
used.
++ = O nly if both outboard rear seats are
p ushed back a nd are flush with the
centre sea t.
X = N o child restraint sy stem permitted.
Not e
z Children und er 12 years or und er 150 cm
tall should only trav el in an ap prop ria te
child sa fety sea t.
z When transporting c hildren, use the child
restra int system s suitable for the childs
weight.
z Check that the child restraint systems
ha ve been correctly installed see
instructions provided with child restraint
sy stem.
z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint
sy stem can b e wiped clean.
z Do not stick any thing on the child
restra int systems and do not cover them
with any other m aterials.
z Only allow child ren to enter and exit at
the side fa cing away from the traffic.
z A child restraint sy stem which has been
subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced.
z Secure or remov e child restraint sy stems
carried in the vehicle when not in use.

Pict ure no: 16424s.t if
Airbag system
Front airb ag
The front airbag system is identified by the
word AI RBAG on the steering wheel and
above the glov e c om partment 3.
The front airbag system comprises:
z An a irb ag with inflator in the steering
wheel and a second behind the trim
panel ab ov e the glove compartment,
z The control elec tronics with impact
sensor,
z Control indicator for airbag sy stems v in
the instrument cluster,
Picture no: 14317s.tif
z Seat occupancy recognition 3,
z The control indicator for Va ux ha ll child
restraint systems with tra nsponders y 3
in the courtesy light.
The front airb ag system will be trigg ered :
z Depending on the severity of the
accident,
z Depending on the ty pe of impact,
z Within the range shown in the
illustration,
z Independently of the side airbag
system 3 and curtain airbag sy stem 3.
Seats, Interior 67
Exception:
Front p assengers seat with seat
occupancy recognition sy stem 3.
The seat occupancy recognition system
deactivates the front a nd side airbag s on
the passengers sid e if the front
passenger s seat is unoccupied, or a
Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 ha s been fitted to the front
passenger s seat.
S eat occupancy recognition see p age 73.
Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 see p age 74.
Examples of events triggering the front
airbag sy stem:
z Impact against a non-y ielding obstacle:
The front airbags are trigg ered at low
vehicle speeds.
z Impact aga inst a y ielding obsta cle (such
as another vehicle):
The front airbags are only trig gered at
hig her vehicle speeds.
68 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 14125s.t if
When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in
milliseconds to form a safety cushion for
the d riv er and front passenger. The
forward movement of the front seat
occupants is c hecked, thereby
sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to
the upp er body and hea d.
No im pairment of view will occur, because
the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly .
Picture no: 14100s.tif
9 Warning
The front airbag sy stem provides
optimum p rotection when the seat,
back rest a nd head restraint are correctly
adjusted: Adjust the drivers seat
according to the occupants height suc h
that with the driver sitting upright the
steering wheel is held in the a rea of its
upper sp ok es with the d riv ers arms
slightly bent.
The front passenger s sea t should be as
far bac k as possible, with the backrest
upright (see pages 3, 44). Do not place
your hea d, body , hands or feet on the
covers of the airbag system s.
Do not place any objects in the area in
which the airb ags inflate. Im portant
inform ation see page 75.
Picture no: 13982.tif
9 Warnin g
The three-point seat belt must b e
correctly fitted see pag e 62.
The front airbag sy stem will not be
triggered in the ev ent of:
z The ignition being switched off,
z Minor frontal collisions,
z Accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z Collisions involving a side or rear-impa ct,
that is to say, if it w ould not be of benefit to
the oc cup ants.

9 Warning
Seat belts m ust therefore a lways be worn.
The front a irb ag system serv es to
supplement the three-point seat belts.
If y ou do not w ear your seat belt, y ou risk
being seriously injured, or even thrown
from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an
accident.
In the event of an accident, the belt helps
to keep you in the correct seating
position, so tha t the front airbag system
can provid e you with effective p rotection.
Seats, Interior 69
In a ddition, the front airbag system will not
be triggered for the front pa ssenger in
model va riants with seat occupa ncy
recognition 3 if:
z The front passenger s sea t is
unoccupied,
z There is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
restraint system with transpond ers 3.
Sea t occupancy recognition see page 73.
Vauxhall c hild restraint system with
tra nsponders 3 see page 74.
Picture no: 14741s.tif
Si de airba g 3
The side airbag sy stem is identified by the
word AI RBAG on the outboard sides of the
front seat back rests.
The side airbag sy stem comprises:
z An airbag w ith infla tor in the back of the
driver s and front passenger s seat
respectively,
z The control electronics,
z The side-imp act sensors,
z Control indicator for airbag sy stems v in
instrument cluster,
z Seat occupancy recognition 3 ,
z The control ind ic ator for Vauxhall child
restra int sy stems with transp onders y 3
in the courtesy light.
6
70 Seats, Interior

Exception:
Front passengers seat with seat occup ancy
recognition system 3. The seat occupancy
recognition system deactivates the
passenger s front and side airbags if the
front passengers seat is unoccupied, or a
Vauxhall child restraint system w ith
transponders 3 ha s been fitted to the front
passenger s sea t.
Sea t occupancy recognition see page 73.
Vauxhall c hild restraint system with
tra nsponders 3 see page 74.

Pict ure no: 14318s.t if Picture no: 14742s.tif

The side airbag system will be triggered: When deployed, the side airbag inflates
within milliseconds to form a safety cushion
z Depend ing on the severity of the
for the d riv er or front passenger in the
accident,
respective front door area. This
z Depend ing on the type of impac t, substantially reduces the risk of injury to
z Within the range shown in the the upper b od y and pelvis in the event of a
illustration, from the centre d oor pillar on side-on collision.
the drivers or front passenger s side,
z Ind ependently of the front airbag
system .
 Seats, Interior 71

9 Warning
There m ust be no objects in the area in
which the airbag inflates or in the area
between the seat back s a nd the vehicle
body. Do not pla ce the hands or arms on
the covers of the airbag system s.
Important information see page 75.
The three-point seat belt m ust always be
correctly fitted see page 62.

The sid e airbags w ill not be trigg ered in the

event of:
z The ignition b eing switched off,
z Frontal collisions,
z Acc idents in which the vehic le overturns,
z Collisions inv olv ing a rea r-im pact,
z Collisions inv olving a side-impact outside
the passenger c ell.
In add ition, the side airbag system will not
be triggered for the front passenger in
model variants with seat occupancy
recognition 3 if:
z The front p assengers seat is
unoccupied ,
z There is a p roperly fitted Va ux ha ll child
restraint system with transponders 3 .
Seat oc cup anc y recognition see pag e 73.
Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with
transponders 3 see pa ge 74.
Picture no: 14129s.tif
Curtai n airbag 3
The curtain airbag system is identified b y
the word AI RBAG on the roof pillar trim.
The curtain airbag system comprises:
z An airbag w ith inflator in the roof fram e
on the driver s and front passengers side
respectively ,
z The control electronics,
z The side-impact sensors,
z C ontrol indicator for airbag systems v in
the instrum ent cluster.
Picture no: 14318s.tif
The curtain a irba g system w ill be trigg ered :
z Depending on the severity of the
accident,
z Depending on the type of impa ct,
z Within the range shown in the
illustration, from the centre door pillar on
the drivers or front pa ssengers side,
z Tog ether w ith the sid e airbag sy stem,
z Irrespectiv e of seat oc cup anc y
recognition,
z Independently of the front a irba g
sy stem.
6
72 Seats, Interior
Pict ure no: 14127s.t if
When the curtain airbag is trig gered, it
infla tes within millisecond s a nd provides a
safety barrier in the head a rea on the
respective side of the vehicle. This reduces
the risk of injury to the head c onsiderab ly in
case of a sid e-impac t.
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in
which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea
between the seat backrests and the
vehicle body .
Do not place the hands or arms on the
covers of the airbag system s.
Imp ortant information see page 75.
The three-point sea t b elt must a lw ays be
correctly fitted see page 62.
The curta in airba gs will not be triggered in
the event of:
z The ig nition being switched off,
z Frontal c ollisions,
z Accidents in which the vehicle ov erturns,
z C ollisions involving a rear-impac t,
z C ollisions involving a side-imp act outside
the passenger cell.
Picture no: 17885s.tif
C ont rol indic ator v for ai rbag syst em s
The function of the airbag sy stems is
monitored elec tronically together with the
seat occupancy recognition 3 a nd the b elt
tensioners, and indicated by the control
indicator v.
When the ignition is switched on, the
control ind icator illum inates for a pprox.
4 seconds. If it d oes not illuminate, does
not go out after 4 seconds or illuminates
while driving, there is a fault in the a irb ag
systems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or
in belt tensioners. See also page 60. The
systems ma y fail to trigger in the event of
an ac cident.
Deployed airbags are ind icated by
continuous illum ination of v.

9 Warning
Have the cause of the fault eliminated
im med ia tely by a work shop.
Self-diagnosis integrated into the system
allows rapid fault identification.
Seat oc cupancy recognition 3
The seat occupancy recognition system
deactivates the front and side front
passengers airba gs if the front
passengers sea t is unoccupied or a
Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with
transponders 3 has been fitted to the front
passengers sea t. The curtain airbag
system 3 rem ains activ ated.
The c ontrol indicator for seat occupancy
recognition y is located in the front
courtesy light. I f control indicator y
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after the
ignition is switched on, the vehicle is
equipp ed with seat occupancy rec ognition
see pa ge 74, Fig. 12135 S.
If a Vauxhall c hild restra int system
with transponders 3 is fitted, c ontrol
indicator y illuminates perm anently after
the ig nition is switched on, as soon as the
system has detected the child restraint
system. Only then may the child restraint
system with transponders 3 be used on the
front passengers seat.
Seats, Interior 73
9 Warnin g
Only Vaux hall child restraint systems with
tra nsponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passeng ers seat. Use of sy stems w ithout
tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can b e identified by a
sticker or badge.
Pict ure no: 15844t.tif
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
can b e identified by the sticker on the front
passengers seat or on the side of the
instrument panel.
Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith
tra nsponders 3 are automatically
detected if correctly fitted to the front
passengers seat. When these child
restra int system s a re being used on the
front passenger s seat, the front and side
airbag systems for the front passengers
seat are dea ctiv ated. The curtain airbag
sy stem rem ains ac tiv ated.
Pa y attention to the control indicator y
for seat occupancy recognition 3
see p age 74.
74 Seats, Interior

Cont rol indica tor y for Vauxha ll child If c ontrol indicator y flashes when the
restraint syst em s with t ransponders 3 child restraint system with transponders is
The p resence of a Vaux hall child restraint correc tly fitted, there is a fa ult, with risk of
system with transp onders is ind ic ated after fatal injury to the child. In this case, only fit
the ig nition has been switc hed on, b y child restraint systems to the outer rear
permanent illumination of the control seats. H ave the cause of the fault
indicator y in the front courtesy light, a s elimina ted b y a work shop.
soon a s the seat occupancy recognition If no Vauxhall child restraint system
system has detected the child restraint with transponders is fitted, the control
system. indicator must not illum inate or flash,
as the front passenger s a irb ag systems
would not deploy in the ev ent of a collision.
Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a
workshop.
Picture no: 12097s.tif
If control indicator y does not illum inate
while driving, the front and side airbag s for
the front passengers seat have not been
deactiv ated a nd there is a risk of fa ta l
injury to the child. In this ca se, only fit child
restra int system s to the outer rea r seats.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a
work shop.
If the child restraint system is not correc tly
installed or the transponders a re defective,
the control indic ator will fla sh. C heck for
correct child restraint system installation.
For insta lla tion of child restraint system
with tra nsponders 3 see instructions
prov ided with child restraint sy stem.

9 Warning
If a Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with
transponders has been fitted a ccord ing
to the instructions, the control indica tor
for Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders y must illumina te in the
front courtesy light when the ignition is
switched on.
If the control indicator does not illuminate
while driving, the front passengers
airb ag systems have not been
deactiva ted a nd there is a risk of fatal
injury. In this case, fit child restraint
system s to the outer rear seats only. Hav e
the cause of the fault eliminated by a
work shop.
Imp or tant
z Due to risk of injury when the airbag s
deploy, a ccessories and objects should
not be placed within the expansion
range of the airbag sy stems.
z Do not place any objects between the
airbag sy stems and the v ehicle
occupants; risk of injury.
9 Warning
Never carry child restraint systems or
other objects on y our la p - risk of fatal
injury .
z Use the hook s in the roof fram e only to
hang up light articles of clothing or coat
hangers. Do not p la ce any objects in the
pockets of the hanging item s risk of
injury .
z The airb ag systems and b elt tensioner
control electronics can be found in the
centre console area . In order to avoid
malfunctions, d o not store magnetic
objec ts in this area.
Seats, Interior 75
z Do not stick any thing on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, front seat
backrests or roof frame, in the vicinity of
the airbags, or on the front p assengers
seat cushion, or cover any of those areas
with other materia ls.
z Use only a dry cloth or interior c leaner to
clean the steering wheel, instrument
panel, front seat backrests, roof fra me
and seat cushion of the front
passeng ers seat. Do not use any
aggressive cleaning agents.
z Only protective covers which are
approved for your vehicle with side
airbag m ay be fitted on the front seats.
When fitting the protective cov ers, make
sure tha t the airbag units on the
outboard sides of the front seat
backrests are not covered.
z The airbag sy stems are triggered
ind epend ently of each other depending
on the severity of the accident a nd the
type of imp act. The side airbag sy stem 3
and the c urtain airbag sy stem 3 are
trig gered together. See seat occupancy
recognition 3 on pag e 73 for ex ceptions.
z Each a irb ag deploys once only. Have a
workshop replace dep loy ed airbags
immediately.
76 Seats, Interior
z The speeds, directions of movement and
deformation properties of the vehicles,
and the properties of the obstacle
concerned, d eterm ine the severity of the
accident and trig gering of the airb ags.
The degree of damag e to y our v ehicle
and the resulting repa ir costs alone a re
not indicative that the criteria for
trigg ering of the airba gs were met.
z Do not p erform any a lterations on the
com ponents of the airbag sy stem, as this
would render the vehic le unroadworthy .
9 Warning
The systems can be triggered ab ruptly
and cause injury if they are handled
im properly.
z We recom mend hav ing the steering
wheel, the instrument p anel, all panelling
parts, the door seals, the hand les and
the seats rem ov ed by a workshop.
z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety
instructions g iven for this must b e
observed. Take the v ehicle to a recy cling
compa ny for disp osal.
z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should
only travel on the rear seats. This does
not apply to children who are travelling
in child restraint systems with
transp onders 3.
z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy
rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy
objec ts on the front passenger s seat
otherwise the airbag system s for the
front p assengers seat may b e triggered
in the event of an accident.
z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy
rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions
do not use protective c ov ers or extra seat
cushions on the front passeng ers seat.
z When using a Vauxhall c hild restraint
sy stem with transponders 3 on the front
passeng ers seat, in order to prevent
malfunctions, no objects (e. g. pla stic
sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be
placed und er the child restraint sy stem.
9 Warnin g
Child restraint systems as well as other
objects must never be carried on the lap
of passengers; risk of fatal injury . If
carried in this way , child restraint system s
with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat
occupancy recognition 3 could lead to
front passenger s airb ag systems not
being triggered in the event of an
accident.
 Seats, Interior 77

Use of child restrai nt systems 3 on the

front p assengers sea t in vehicl es wi th
airb ag system s 3 , but w ithout seat
occupa ncy recog ni tion 3

9 Warning
Vehicles with front passenger s airbag
without side airb ag 3: Child restraint
system s fac ing the rear of the vehicle
must not be installed on the front
passengers seat, risk of fatal injury.
Child restraint sy stems facing the
direction of travel (child restra int systems
for weight classes I, II a nd III , see p age 65)
may be insta lled on the front passengers Picture no: 11704a.tif Picture no: 14791s.tif
Vehicles with front passeng ers airbag can
seat if the seat has been pushed ba ck as be recognised by the word AI RBAG above 9 Warnin g
far as it will g o and the backrest has been the glove compartment and by the sticker
adjusted suc h that the lap belt fits snug ly. Vehic les with sid e airbag 3:
on the instrum ent p anel on the passengers
side - see illustration above. No child restraint system 3 may be
fitted on the front passenger s sea t;
risk of fatal injury.

A v ehicle with side airbags can b e

identified by the word A IRBAG on the
outboard sides of the front seat b ackrests.
S eat occupancy recognition 3
see page 73.
78 Seats, Interior
Pi cture no: 15844t.tif
Use of child restrai nt systems 3 on front
passengers seat in vehicles wit h airbag
systems 3 a nd wit h seat occupancy
recogniti on 3
9 Warning
Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passengers seats. Use of system s
without transponders poses a risk of fatal
injury.
Vehicles with seat oc cup anc y recog nition
are identified by a sticker on the lower
panel of the front passeng ers seat
see illustration above.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Vauxhall child restraint sy stems
with transponders 3 and switches off the
front and side airbag system s for the front
passenger s seat. The curtain airba g
system remains activated.
S eat occupancy recognition see page 73.
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can b e identified by a
sticker or badge.
Picture no: 12097s.tif
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
can also be recognised by control
indica tor y in the front courtesy light.
If control indicator y illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the vehicle is equipped with
seat occupancy rec ognition - see page 73.

Pict ure no: 14111s.t if
Cigarette lighter 3
The c ig arette lighter is behind the ashtray
cover.
The c ov er opens w hen pressed a t the
centre point. See Fig. 14354 S on page 80.
Press in cigarette lighter with the ignition
switched on. S witches off autom atically
when elem ent is glowing. Withdraw
cigarette lighter.
Seats, Interior 79
The maximum power c onsumption of
electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed
120 w atts.
Do not connect any current-delivering
acc essories, e.g. electrical charging
devices or b atteries.
Electrical ac cessories connected to the
socket must c om ply with the
electromagnetic compatibility
requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,
otherwise v ehicle malfunctions may oc cur.
If the tyre repair k it is 3 is in operation, no
consum ers may be connected to the
auxiliary sock et.
Picture no: 16111s.tif
Accessory soc kets 3
An accessory sock et is located behind the
ashtray cover. Additional accessory
sockets 3 can b e found in the centre
console in front of the back rests and in the
lugg age compartment.
Ac cessory sockets can be used to connect
electrica l accessories.
Ac cessory sockets are operable when the
ignition is switc hed on. Use of the sockets
while the engine is not running w ill drain
the battery.
Do not d amage the socket by using
unsuita ble plugs.
80 Seats, Interior

Pict ure no: 14111s.t if
Ashtrays
To be used only for ash and not for
combustible rubbish.
9 Warning
Failure to observe these descriptions can
lead to injuries which may be fatal.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
according ly .
Picture no: 16110s.tif
To empty , grip b oth sides of the ashtray
insert a t the points illustrated and pull
up wards.
Picture no: 14114s.tif
Rear a sht ray 3
In the rear c entre console.
To open, pull ashtray towards the rear of
the vehicle.
To empty, open the ashtray, press the
spring (see arrow in illustration) and pull
out the a shtray.

Ashtray, front
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated .
 Seats, Interior 81

Pict ure no: 17884s.t if
Ashtray 3
For universal use in vehic le interiors, e.g . in
the front or rear of the centre console or in
foldaway tables 3 (see next page).
O pen cover to use.
Picture no: 11699s.tif
Stowage compartments
Stowa ge compa rtment beneath front
passengers seat 3
Lift tray by grasping recessed edge and
pull forwards. Maximum load : 1 kg.
To close the tray , push it in and lock it in
place.
Picture no: 14115s.tif
Glov e c ompar tment
To open, pull handle upw ards.
O n the insid e of the glove compartment
cover there is a pen holder.
The glove com partment should be closed
while driving.
C ooled glove compartm ent 3
see page 119.
82 Seats, Interior

Foldaway tables 3
Located on the front seat back rests.
O pen b y pulling upwards until it engages.
Fold away by pressing d ow n past the
resistance p oint.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
foldaway tables.

Pict ure no: 11701s.t if Picture no: 16384s.tif

Stow age com partm ent for glasses 3 Stowa ge c ompart ments in rea r footwell 3
Loc ated on d riv ers side. Fold down to To open, unclip cover at recess and lift up.
open.
Do not store heav y objects in the stowag e
compartment.
 Seats, Interior 83

Sunvisors
Use the sunvisor to p rotect from glare, by
pulling it down and/or swivelling it to the
side.
While driving, the mirrors in the sunvisors
should be covered.

Pict ure no: 14116s.t if

Coin holder
Loc ated in the centre console.
84 In struments, Controls

Instruments,
Controls

Picture no: 17876s.tif Picture no:

Control indic ators X
The control indica tors described here are Seat belt wa rning devic e 3
Control indicators .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 84 not present in all vehic les. The descriptions C ontrol indicator illuminates in red.
Instrument display ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 89 however, apply to all instrument versions. Illuminates after turning on the ignition
Information display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 92 The control indica tor colours mean: (with warning tone) until the seat belt is
Warning buzzers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 103 app lied. Ap ply seat belt, see pa ge 62.
z Red Danger, important rem ind er,
Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 103
Wind screen wash system and z Y ellow Warning , note, fault, B
Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3
headlight wash system 3 ... .... .... ..... . 104 z Green O n confirmation,
C ontrol indicator illuminates in yellow .
Rear window wash and wiper system 104 z Blue O n confirmation.
If it is illuminated:
Fault in sy stem.
C ontact a workshop for help.
AFL 3 see pag e 109.

Pict ure no: 18385s.t if
> Illum inates when the engine is running:
Front fog lig hts 3
Control indicator illum inates in green.
It is illuminated when the front fog lights
are on see page 106.
A page 147. C ontact a workshop
Eng ine electr oni cs,
tra nsm ission electronic s, immob iliser,
diesel fuel filter 3, Easyt ronic 3, fault
Control indicator illum inates or flashes in
yellow.
It illuminates for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on.
Picture no:
Fault in eng ine or gearbox electronic
sy stem. Electronics hav e switched to
emergency running programm e. Fuel
consumption may be increased a nd the
C ontrol indicator illuminates in red.
vehicles driveab ility reduced, see
immed iately.
For vehicles w ith a diesel engine, the diesel
fuel filter m ay need to be drained of water,
see p age 230.
If it flashes when the ignition is on:
Fault in the electronic im mobiliser sy stem;
the engine cannot be started
see p age 27.
In struments, Controls 85
Z
Exhaust emi ssion
C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes in
yellow.
It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched
on and g oes out shortly after the engine
starts.
If it illuminates w hen the engine is running:
Fault in emission c ontrol system. The
permitted emissions may be ex ceeded.
C ontact a workshop immediately.
If it flashes when the engine is running:
Fault which could lead to damag e to the
cataly tic conv erter, see pa ge 147. Contact
a work shop imm ediately.
v
Airb ag system s 3 ,
b elt tensioners
If it illuminates w hen the engine is running:
Fault in the airbag or belt tensioner
systems, see pa ges 60, 72.
86 In struments, Controls
Pict ure no: 17876s.t if
I 3. Mov e gearshift lever to neutra l, or with
Eng ine oi l pressure
Control indicator illum inates in red.
It illuminates when the ignition is switched
on and goes out shortly after the engine
starts.
If it illuminates when the eng ine is running:
Engine lubrication ma y b e interrupted. This
may result in d amage to the engine a nd /or
locking of the drive wheels:
1. Move out of the flow of tra ffic as quickly
as possible, without imp eding other
vehicles.
2. Depress clutch.
Picture no:
Easy tronic 3 , place selector lever in N.
4. Sw itch off ignition.
9 Warning
When the engine is off, consid erably
more force is need ed to brak e and steer.
Do not rem ov e key until vehicle has come
to a standstill, otherwise the steering
column loc k could eng age unex pectedly.
Check oil level before contacting a
work shop.
O
Turn signal lights
C ontrol indicator flashes green.
The corresp onding c ontrol indicator
flashes on the side selected.
Both control indic ators flash with the
hazard warning lights on.
Rapid flashing:
Failure of a turn signal bulb or
associa ted fuse.
C ha nge bulbs, see page 190.
Fuses, see page 188.
C
Headl ight m ain beam
C ontrol indicator illuminates in blue.
It is illuminated when main bea m is on and
during head lig ht flash see p ages 9, 105.

Pict ure no: 18385s.t if
j 9 Warnin g
Easytronic 3, start engi ne
Control indicator illum inates in yellow.
It illum ina tes if the footb ra ke is not applied
when starting the engine. The indicator
goes off as soon a s the footbra ke is
applied. The engine can only be sta rted
with the footbrake applied, see pag e 133.
T
Easytronic winter prog ramm e 3
Control indicator is illuminated when winter
programme is enab led.
Further information see pa ge 135.
In struments, Controls 87
If it illuminates w hen the engine is running:
S top, sw itc h off engine. Ba ttery is not
charging. Check drive belt c ondition and
tensioning before contacting a workshop.
R
Brak e system,
cl ut ch system 3
C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes in
red.
It illuminates after the ignition is turned on,
when the handbrake is applied or if the
brak e or clutch fluid lev el is too low. For
further inform ation, see p ages 156, 232.
Picture no:
m
Cruise control 3 Illum ina tes when the ha nd brake is
Control indica tor illuminates in green. applied . Stop driv ing immediately .
Contact a w ork shop imm ediately.
It is illum inated when the sy stem is on see
page 151.
O n vehicles with Easytronic 3, control
r indicator R flashes for a few second s after
Fog t ail li ght the ignition is switched off, if the
Control indica tor illuminates in y ellow. handbrake has not been applied.
It is illuminated when the fog ta il light is on
see page 107. u
Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em (ABS )
p C ontrol indicator illuminates in red.
Alternator If it illuminates w hile driving:
Control indica tor illuminates in red. Fault in ABS, see pa ge 156.
It illum ina tes when the ignition is switched
on a nd goes out shortly after the engine
starts.
88 In struments, Controls
Pict ure no: 17876s.t if
S v
Eng ine oi l level 3
Control indicator illum inates in yellow.
In vehicles with engine oil lev el check, the
oil lev el is chec ked autom atically .
If it illum ina tes when the engine is running:
Engine oil level too low. C heck engine oil
lev el and top up engine oil if necessary, see
page 228.
EPS1 )
Elec tric Power St eering
Control indicator illum inates in yellow.
Fault in Electric Power S teering. Vehicle can
still b e driven, but greater forc e is required
for steering. Contact a workshop
immediately .
1)
EPS = Electric P ower Steering .
Picture no:
Electronic Stab ility Program me
(ESP Pl us ) 3
Control indica tor flashes or illuminates in
yellow.
If it flashes during d riv ing:
System actively enga ged, see page 149.
If it illum ina tes while driv ing:
Fault in Electronic Stability Program me,
see p age 149.
Y
Fuel level
Control indica tor illuminates or flashes in
yellow.
If it illum ina tes:
Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserve area.
If it flashes:
Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately .
N ever let the tank run dry!
Erra tic fuel sup ply can c ause catalytic
converter to overheat, see pa ge 145.
Diesel engines:
If the tank is run dry, bleed the fuel system
as desc ribed on pa ge 170.
!
Prehea ting system for diesel engines 3,
d i esel par ticle filt er 3
C ontrol indicator illuminates in yellow .
Preheating system active, switches on only
if outside temperature is low.
If it flashes (with diesel particle filter):
Diesel particle filter must be cleaned .
C ontinue driving, and as soon as road and
traffic conditions allow, increase speed to
over 25 m ph (40 km/h) to start c leaning of
the diesel p artic le filter. The control
indicator goes out when cleaning is
complete. We recommend not turning off
the ignition during cleaning.
Further information see page 148.
 In struments, Controls 89

Pict ure no: 12097s.t if Picture no: 17879s.tif Picture no:

y In strument display
Seat oc cupancy recognition 3 In some versions, the pointers of the
see pages 67, 73. tachom eter, the speedometer, the c oolant
temperature gauge and the fuel gauge
briefly go to the end stop as a functionality
check.
Ta chometer
Indicates eng ine speed.
Warning zone: Max im um permissible
engine speed exceed ed; danger to engine.
Speedometer
Speed d isplay .
Mil ea ge / k ilometre di sp lay
If the ignition is off, the mileage is
displayed for approx. 15 seconds b y briefly
pressing the reset knob.
Top line:
Trip odometer
Display of m iles / kilom etres cov ered since
last reset.
To reset, hold the reset knob d epressed
for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
Bottom line:
O dometer
Records the miles / kilometres driven.
Maintenance, Inspec tion system -
see pages 91, 226.
90 In struments, Controls

For physical reasons, the engine

temperature gauge show s the coolant
temperature only if the coolant level is
adeq uate.
During operation, the system is
pressurised. The tem perature may
therefore rise briefly to ov er 100 C.

Pict ure no: 17906s.t if Picture no: 17907s.tif

Coola nt temperat ure d isplay Fuel gauge
Pointer in zone at = Engine operating Pointer in red = Reserv e level.
left temperature not y et warning
reached. zone or Y
illuminated
Pointer between = Normal operating
the z ones temperature. Pointer in red = Refuel immediately
warning see page 143.
Pointer in zone a t = Temperature too zone or Y
right high: flashing
(warning zone) Stop vehicle and
N ever run the tank dry !
switch off eng ine.
Danger to engine. Diesel engines: I f the tank is run dry, b leed
Check coolant level, the fuel sy stem as desc rib ed on pag e 170.
see p age 231.
Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
ma y be less than the spec ified tank
cap acity.
 In struments, Controls 91

R Reverse gea r.
N N eutral.
A Automatic mode of Easy tronic.
1-5 Manual m od e, current gear of
Easy tronic.
Easy tronic 3 - see page 132.

Pict ure no: 17901s.t if Picture no: 17878s.tif

Servi ce display 3 Tr ansm issi on display 3
When the indica tor in the display of the Display of current gear or mode with
odometer app ears, mak e a Service Easytronic 3.
appointment with a workshop as soon as
possible.
Maintenance, Inspection system -
see page 226.
92 In struments, Controls

For Infotainment system, see Infotainment

system op erating instructions.
An F in the display ind icates a fault.
Board Computer 19,5 19:36
Hav e the ca use eliminated b y a workshop .
BC 1 All values

12:01 17,0C BC 2
257.0
1
miles
Timer
FM 3 90,6 MHz 40 mph

REG AS RDS TP
7.0
8
gals

31.0 mpg

Pict ure no: 17913s.t if Pict ure no: 16719t.tif

Information display Graphica l Informa tion Display 3,
Tripl e I nformati on Di sp lay 3 Colour Inform ation Displ ay 3
Display of time, outside tempera ture and Display of time, outside temp erature a nd
date / Infotainment sy stem (when it is on). date / Infotainment system (when it is on).

When the ignition is off, the time, date and
outside tem perature can be made to
appear for approx. 15 seconds by briefly
pressing one of the two buttons adjacent
to the d isplay .
An F in the display indica tes a fault.
Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop.
The Graphical Information Displa y
presents the information in monochrome.
The Colour Information Display presents
the inform ation in c olour.
The information that is d isplay ed depend s
on the Infota inm ent system c onfiguration.
Some information app ears in the disp lay in
an abbreviated form.
 In struments, Controls 93

9 Warnin g
Caution: The road surface may already
be icy , ev en though the display ind ic ates
a few deg rees ab ov e 0 C .
:
8:56 -5 ,5 C Slippery road
07.04.2004 -2, 5C

OK

Pict ure no: 17913s.t if Pict ure no: 16707t.tif

Outside temperature In vehicles with Graphic al Inform ation
A fall in temperature is indica ted Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3,
immediately and a rise in temp erature an icy road surface warning message
after a time delay . appea rs in the disp la y.

If the externa l temperature falls to 3 C, to No message is disp la yed if the

warn of ice on the road the symbol : temperature is less than -5 C.
appears in the Triple Informa tion Display.
When the temperature climbs, the
symbol : goes out above 5 C.
94 In struments, Controls

Correcting time: Deactivating / activating automatic tim e

Some RDS transmitters do not send a synchronisation: With Infota inm ent sy stem
correct time sig nal. If the incorrect time is off, press and ; next to the display:
display ed on frequent occasions, Hold down for a pprox. 2 sec., cloc k
deactiv ate autom atic time synchronisation display is now in setting m ode,
see nex t colum n, and set the time
8 :56 5 ,5C manually. Press twice (until year flashes).
The automatic setting is indicated by } in Press and hold down for approx.
07.04.2004 the display. 3 seconds until } flashes in display 3
and text " RDS TIME" ap pears (years
flash during this time),
Press ;; display shows:
RDS TIME 0 = O ff
Press ;; display shows:
Pict ure no: 17914s.t if RDS TIME 1 = O n
Triple Information Display Press three tim es.
Set d ate and ti me
With Infotainment sy stem off,
press and ; next to the display as
follow s:
Press for ap prox . 2 seconds:
Day fla shes
;: Set day
: Month fla shes
;: Set month
: Year flashes
;: Set year
: Hours flash
;: Set hours
: Minutes flash
;: Set minutes
: Clock is started.
 In struments, Controls 95

FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3

90.6 MHz

19,5 19: 36

Pi cture no: 16711t.tif
Graphical Info rmatio n D isplay 3
or Colour Information Display 3 ,
selecting functio ns
Functions and their menus are shown in the
Graphical Information Displa y and C olour
Information Display .
These functions are highlighted or
executed in the m enu display v ia the
four-wa y b utton, the m ulti-func tion knob 3
on the I nfotainment S ystem or the rem ote
control buttons 3 on the steering wheel.
Pict ure no: 15593t.tif
To select w ith four-wa y but ton
Select menu items via menus and with the
buttons / four-way button of the
Infotainment sy stem.
Picture no: 15559t.tif
Selecti on with the mul ti-function k nob 3
Turn:
Highlighting of menu options or
comm ands, selection of func tion ranges.
Press:
S elec tion of highlighting, confirma tion of
comm ands.
To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion
knob left or right to Return or Mai n and
select.
6
96 In struments, Controls

7 Settings 19,5 19:36

FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3 Time, Date 19:36
Language
90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004
Contrast
Day / Night
19,5 19: 36 6 Ign. logic

Pict ure no: 14034s.t if
Selection using rem ot e c ontrol butt ons 3
on steeri ng wheel
Select menu options v ia menus and w ith
the b uttons.
Pict ure no: 16711t.tif
For each functional area, there is a m ain
page (Main), which is selected at the top
edge of the d isplay (not with the
Infotainment sy stem CD 30 without the
ha nds-free mobile phone system):
z Audio,
z Na vigation 3,
z Telephone 3 ,
z Trip comp uter 3.
Function areas audio, nav ig ation 3 and
telep hone 3 see Infotainment sy stem
op erating instructions.
Picture no: 16712t.tif
System settings
The settings are accessed via the Setting s
menu.
Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all
Infotainment sy stems) on the Infotainm ent
system (c all up main display).
Press the S ett ings button on the
Infotainment system. For I nfotainment
system CD 30, no menu m ay b e selected.
The Settings m enu is displa yed.
 In struments, Controls 97

Correcting time:
Some RDS transmitters 1) do not send
correct time sig nals. If the incorrect time is
7 Time, Date 19,5 19:36 frequently d isplay ed, deac tiv ate 7 Settings 19,5 19:36
autom atic time synchronisation and set the
Time 19:36 Time, Date
tim e m anually .
Language Deutsch
To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select
Date 10 . 07 . 2004 menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. Units English
from the Time, Da te menu. Contrast Espaol

6 Synchron. clock automatical. The box in front of Synchron. clock Day / Night ...
automat ical. will be ticked see 6 Ign. logic
Fig. 16713 T.

Pi cture no: 16713t.tif Picture no: 16714t.tif

Setti ng the date and time 3 Languag e selection
Select menu item Time, Dat e from the Y ou can select the display language for
Setti ng s menu. some functions.
The m enu for Time, Date is displayed. S elec t menu item Language from the
Sett ings menu.
Select the menu items required.
The available languages are displayed.
Make the desired setting.
6

1)
RDS = Rad io D ata S ys tem.
98 In struments, Controls

7 13 Languages 19,5 19:36 7 Settings 19,5 19:36 7 Contrast 19,5 19:36

X Deutsch Time, Date

English Language ~ Europe-SI
Espaol Units | Japan 12
Nederlands Contrast | Great Britain
F ranais Day / Night | USA
Italiano 6 Ign. logic

Pi cture no: 16715t.tif
Select the desired language.
Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of
the m enu item .
In systems with voice output 3, w hen the
language setting of the d isplay is changed,
the system will ask whether the
announcement language should also be
changed see Infotainment system
opera ting instruc tions.
Pict ure no: 16716t.tif
Setting unit s of m easur e
You can select which units of measure are
to be used .
Select menu item U ni ts from the S et tings
menu.
The ava ilab le units are display ed.
Select the desired unit.
Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the menu item.
Picture no: 16717t.tif
Ad just ing contra st 3
(Graphic al Inform ation Displ ay)
S elec t menu item Cont rast from the
Sett ings menu.
The menu for Contr ast is disp layed .
C onfirm the required setting .
 In struments, Controls 99

Setti ng displa y ill um inati on 3

The d isplay can be adjusted to suit the
lighting conditions, black or coloured text
on a lig ht bac kground or white or coloured Board Computer 19,5 19:36
tex t on a dark backg round. BC 1 All values
Select menu item Day / N ight from the BC 2 Range 257 miles
Setti ng s menu. 257.0
1
miles

The options are display ed.

Timer
40 mph
Inst. Consumpt. 31 mpg
Autom atic: Aver. Consump. 31 mpg
7.0
8
gals
Adapted based on vehicle lighting .
31.0 mpg
19,5 19: 36
Alw ays da y design:
Black or coloured text on light bac kground.
Alw ays night desi gn:
White or coloured text on dark Pict ure no: 16719t.tif Picture no: 16710t.tif
back ground. Graphic al Information Display 3 Ra ng e
or Colour Information Display 3, Range is calculated from current fuel tank
Selections are indicated by a o in front of content and instantaneous consumption.
the m enu item . trip computer 3
The display shows av erage values.
The trip computers provide information on
Ig ni tion logic 3 driving data, which is continually recorded When the vehicle has been refuelled, the
See Infotainment sy stem opera ting range is up dated autom atically after a
and ev alua ted electronically.
instructions. brief delay .
The on-board computer main page gives
information on range, instantaneous
consumption and average consumption 3.
To display the other trip computer d riv ing
information, press BC button on
Infotainment sy stem 3 or select trip
computer menu on disp la y.
For vehicles with Infotainm ent
System CD 30 3 and steering wheel rem ote
control 3 , the left-hand steering wheel
buttons only opera te the trip computer.
100 In struments, Controls

Di st ance trav ell ed

Display of miles / kilometres travelled.
The measurement ca n be reset to zero at
any time and restarted, see nex t colum n. Board Computer 19,5 19:36
BC 1 All values
Average speed
Calculation of avera ge speed. BC 2
Range 257.0
1
miles
The measurement ca n be reset to zero at Timer
2 3 m ile s any time and restarted, see nex t colum n. 40 mph

Stoppages in the journey with the ignition 7.0

8
gals
off are not includ ed in the calculations. 31.0 mpg
OK
Effectiv e consum ption
Display of fuel used.
The measurement ca n be reset to zero at
Pi cture no: 16718t.tif Picture no: 16719t.tif
If less than 30 miles (50 k m) can be driven any time and restarted, see nex t colum n. Reset trip computer inform ation
with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the Average consumpt ion The following trip com puter inform ation
warning "Range" a ppears on the d isplay . Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. can b e reset (restart measurements):
If less than 20 miles (30 k m) can be driven The measurement ca n be reset to zero at z Distance travelled,
with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the any time and restarted, see nex t colum n. z Average speed,
warning "Please refuel! " 3 appears on the z Effective consum ption,
display. z Average consum ption.
Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed S elec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
on page 95. menu.
Instant aneous consump tion
Display changes depending on speed :
Display in gal/h below 8 mph
(13 km/h),
Display in mp g ab ov e 8 m ph
(13 km/h).
 In struments, Controls 101

I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly

If the power supp ly has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low,
Reset BC 1 19,5 19:36 Reset BC 1 19,5 19:36 the values stored in the trip computer w ill
be lost.
All values All values

257.0 m iles 257.0 m iles

40 m ph 40 m ph

7.0 gals 7.0 gals

31.0 m pg 31.0 m pg

Pi cture no: 16720t.tif Pict ure no: 16721t.tif

The information of both trip c om puters can
be reset separately and therefore p rov id es
a facility for evaluating information ov er
different tim e p eriods.
Select the desired trip computer
inform ation.
The v alue for the selected function will b e
reset and reca lculated.
To reset all trip computer information,
select m enu item All v alues.
After resetting, " - - -" is d isplay ed with the
trip computer information selected. The
recalculated values are displayed after a
brief delay.
102 In struments, Controls

The stop watch inform ation to b e

display ed can be selected via menu
Opt ions 3:
Board Computer 19,5 19:36
Dr iving Ti me excl. S tops
BC 1 Measurement of the time the v ehicle is in
motion. Stationary time is not included.
BC 2 00:00:00
Dr iving Ti me incl. S tops
Timer
Measurement of the time the v ehicle is in
Start motion. The time the v ehicle is stationary
Reset with the key in the starter sw itc h is
Options
included.
Tr avel Time
Measurement of the time from manual
activation via Sta rt to manual deactivation
Pi cture no: 16722t.tif via Reset .
Stop wat ch
Select menu item Timer from the Board
Com puter menu.
The Tim er menu is displayed.
To start, selec t menu item St art.
To reset, selec t menu item Reset .
 In struments, Controls 103

Warning buzzers Ad just able wi per interval

When starting the engine or while d riv ing: S etting wiper interval to a value between
z if seat belt is not fastened 3, 2 and 15 seconds:
S ta lk to timed interval w ipe p osition $,
z if a specified maxim um speed is stalk to ,
exceed ed 3, wait for desired interv al time,
z for Easytronic 3 - if A, M or R is selected push stalk back to tim ed interval wipe
while the engine is running a nd the position $.
driv ers door is opened b ut the footbrak e The interval time selected remains stored
is not applied. until it is next c hanged or until the ignition
is turned off.
When the vehicle is parked and the d riv ers
door is opened: After turning on the ignition and setting the
z with the key in the ignition, lever to timed interval wipe position $ , the
interva l is set to 7 seconds.
z with parking lights or dipped beam Pict ure no: 14055h.tif
switched on,
Windscreen wiper
z if the turn signal stalk is eng aged. To activate, press sta lk briefly up wards
= Off
$ = Ad justable timed interval wipe
% = Slow
& = Fast
104 In struments, Controls
Pi cture no: 14056h.tif
Windscreen wash system and
headlight wash system 3
To activate, pull stalk towards steering
wheel.
The w ip er will swipe for a few strokes.
The headlight wash sy stem 3 can be
opera ted when the lights are on.
Pict ure no: 14057h.tif
Rear window wash and wiper
system
To activate, push stalk forwards.
The rea r window wiper swip es in timed
interval mode.
To deactiv ate, pull stalk tow ards steering
wheel.
If the stalk is held forwa rd s, the rea r
wind ow wash is engaged for the duration
of activation.
The wiper will swipe for a few strokes when
washing.
 Lightin g 105

Lighting Vehicles with d aytime running lights 3:

With the ignition on and the light
switch on 7, dipped beam without
instrument illum ination is on.
The day time running lights switch off when
the ignition is switched off.
Follow the regula tions of the country in
which you are driving w hen using da ytime
running lig hts and fog lights 3.
Ex terior lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 105 Driving ab road see pag e 113.
Main beam, headlight flash . .... .... ..... . 106
Turn signal lights . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 106
Front fog lights > 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 106
Fog tail light r .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 107
Picture no: 14756s.tif
Haza rd warning lights.. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 107
Exterior lights
Headlight range adjustment ? .... ..... . 107
Turn light switch:
Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) 3 . 109
Door-to-door lighting func tion 3 . ..... . 110 7 = Off
Activating the exterior lighting w ith 8 = Park ing lights
the remote control 3.. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 110 9 = Dip ped beam
Instrument illum ination k, or main bea m
Informa tion display illum ination ..... . 111
In positions 8 a nd 9, the tail lights and
Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 111
numb er plate lights are also on.
Battery discharge p rotection 3 .... ..... . 113
Light covers. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 113 If the ignition is switched off with the
Headlights w hen driving abroad . ..... . 113 dipped bea m or main b eam on, the
parking lights illuminate 3.
106 Ligh ting
Pict ure no: 18475s.t if
Main beam, headlight flash
To switch from d ip ped to main beam , push
stalk forwards.
To switch to dipped beam, p ush stalk
forwards again.
To activate the headlight flash, pull stalk
towards steering w heel. Main beam is
enga ged for the duration of a ctivation.
When the main bea m or head lig ht flash is
activated, the blue control indicator C
lights.
Pict ure no: 14054h.tif Picture no: 14758s.tif
Turn signal lights Front fog lights > 3
To activate, push stalk up or down. On = Press >, > illuminates in
instrum ent cluster.
Stalk up = Right turn signa l light
Stalk down = Left turn signa l light O ff = Press > aga in or switch off
ig nition or head lig hts.
If the stalk is moved pa st the resistance
The front fog lights can only be switched on
point, the turn signal lig ht remains on.
when both the ignition and the headlights
When the steering wheel moves ba ck
are on.
tow ards the straig ht-ahead position, the
turn signal light is autom atically
deactiv ated.
Brief flash: Push stalk to resistanc e point
and release.
 Lightin g 107

Fog tail light r

On = Press r, r illuminates in
instrument cluster.
O ff = Press r aga in or switch off
ignition or dipped beam /
pa rk ing lights.
The fog ta il light can only be sw itc hed
on when b oth the ignition and the
dipped beam / park ing lights are on.
The fog ta il light on the vehicle is
deactivated when towing a caravan /
trailer.

Reversin g lights Picture no: 14303s.tif Picture no: 14757s.tif

Illuminate when rev erse gear is enga ged
and the ignition is switched on.
Hazard warning lights
To activate, press button .
To deactiv ate, press button again.
To aid location of the pushb utton, the red
surface is illuminated when the ignition is
switched on. When the button is pressed,
its control indicator flashes in time with the
ha zard warning lights.
Headlight range adjustment ?
Ma nua l hea dlight range adj ustm ent
With dipped beam switched on, adjust
hea dlight range in four steps to suit vehic le
load. Push to release knob and turn it
aga inst resista nce to the required position.
108 Ligh ting

Correct adjustment of the headlight range Automat ic head light range adjustment 3
red uces dazzle for other road users. On vehicles with Xenon headlights,
headlight range is adjusted automatically
Front sea ts occupied = 0
based on v ehicle load .
All seats occupied = 1
All seats occupied and
luggage compartment
load = 2
Driver s seat occupied
and luggag e
compartment load = 3

Pictu re no: 15209j.tif
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) 3
AFL im prov es illumina tion of:
z Curves (curve lighting),
z Intersections and tig ht turns
(turn lighting ).
Curv e lighting (1)
The light b eam pivots based on steering
wheel position and speed (from approx.
6 mph (10 km/h)).
The headlights shine a t an angle of up
to 15 to the right or left of the direction of
travel.
Picture no:
Turn l ighting (2)
An additional light illuminates at certain
steering wheel positions (after
approx. 90), turn sig na l settings and
speeds (up to ap prox . 25 mph (40 km/h)).
The light shines a pprox. 90 to the left or
rig ht of the vehicle and a pprox. 30 metres
to the front.
Rev erse functi on
Turning the headlights on, selecting
reverse gear and switching a turn signal
lig ht on c auses the turn lighting to be
switched on for the respective side.
When the turn signal is switched off, the
turn lighting continues to illuminate for
approx. 15 seconds.
Lightin g 109
Picture no: 17887s.tif
C ont rol indic ator B for adap tive dri ving
lig hts
Illuminated : Fault in sy stem.
The sy stem is not ready for operation.
C ontact a workshop.
The steering angle sensor m ust be
calibrated after a power supply
interruption, in order to m ake the system
operational. See pa ge 150.
If the control indicator B flashes for
app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, this is a reminder that the
hea dlights have been set to sy mmetrical
dipp ed b eam; see "Headlights w hen
driving a broa d" on pag e 113.
110 Ligh ting

If the driver s door is left open, the lights will

go out after app rox . two minutes.
The light goes out imm ediately if the
ignition key is inserted in the starter switch
or the turn signal stalk is mov ed a gain.

Pict ure no: 14302s.t if Picture no: 17920S.tif

Doo r-to-door lighting fun ction 3 Activating the exterior ligh ting
The d ipped beam illum ina tes for approx. with the remo te control 3
30 second s a fter leav ing the vehicle a nd The welcome light func tion engages the
closing the drivers door. dipp ed b eam for a pprox. 30 seconds.
To act ivat e: This feature m ust be activa ted (once):
1. Switch off ignition. Unlock the vehicle, put the ignition k ey in
2. Remove ignition key . the starter switch and press the light switch
for approx. 5 seconds - see Fig. 14136 S on
3. Open driver s d oor. nex t page.
4. Pull turn sig nal stalk tow ards steering To deactivate the function, conta ct a
wheel. workshop.
5. Close drivers door.
 Lightin g 111

To activate the welcome light function,

press button q on the remote control
twice, with the vehicle locked.
Country-specific v ersion 3 :
To enable the welcome light function, press
button q on the rem ote control once, with
the v ehicle loc ked.
This fea ture is deactivated im med iately by
pressing button p on the remote control or
by switching on the ignition.

Picture no: 14759s.tif Picture no: 14136s.tif

In strument illumination k ,
In formation display illumination
Illum inates when ignition is switched on.
Brig htness can be adjusted when the
exterior lights are on:
Push to release knob k a nd then turn it
cloc kwise or anticlockwise and hold until
the desired brightness is obtained.
Display illum ination 3 see page 99.
Courtesy light
Autom atic interior light
Illuminates automatically when the vehicle
is unlocked with the remote control or when
a door is opened.
Goes off automatically a fter a delay w hen
the doors are closed or im mediately w hen
the ig nition is switched on or the doors are
locked.
Front courtesy l ight
Manual operation from inside, with doors
closed:
On = Press light switch 0
O ff = Press light switch 0 a gain
112 Ligh ting

Entry l ighting 3
After unlocking the v ehicle, the instrument
panel and switch lighting p lus the courtesy
lights illum inate for a few seconds.
I lluminat ed mirror i n the sunvi sors 3
The lig hting switches on when the cover is
opened.
Glov e c ompar tment lig ht ing
Illuminates when ignition is on and the
glove compa rtm ent lid is opened.
C igarette lig hter
and ashtray illumi na tion 3
Illuminates when ignition is switched on.

Pict ure no: 11607s.t if
Front reading l ights 3
Left and right reading lights are
individually operable. With ignition on:
On = Press button
O ff = Press button again
Pict ure no: 12344t.tif Luggag e c ompart ment light ing
Courtesy lig hts, Illuminates when the luggage
rea r reading l ights 3 compa rtm ent is opened.
Centre sw itc h position: Autom atica lly reg ul ated centre console
The rear courtesy light illuminates together lig hting 3
with the front courtesy lights when a door is S potlight in housing of interior m irror.
op ened .
Day lig ht-dependent, automatically
The rear reading lights on the left and right regula ted centre console lighting with
can be switched on separately. ignition switched on.
With ignition on:
On = Switch position I
Off = Switch position 0

Battery discharge protectio n 3
Some consum ers, suc h as the interior
lighting switch them selves off after ap prox .
30 minutes if the ignition is off, in order to
protect the battery charge.
Light covers
The inside of the light covers m ay briefly
mist up under unfavourable wet / cold
weather conditions, d uring heavy rain or
after the vehic le has been washed. The
misting disa ppears of its own accord after
a short time, but can be accelerated by
switching on the lights.
Headlights when driving abroad
The a sym metrical dipped bea m increases
the field of vision on the passengers side of
the la ne.
This causes glare for oncom ing traffic if the
vehic le is driven in countries where traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road.
Do as follow s to p revent glare:
Lightin g 113
Vehicles wit h
Halogen headlig ht system or
Xenon headlig ht system 3
Have a workshop convert the head lights.
Vehicles wit h Adapt ive Forward
Lig hting (AFL) 3
1. Pull stalk for main beam towards
steering wheel and hold
(headlight flash).
2. Sw itch on ignition.
3. After ap prox . 3 seconds, an a coustic
signal sounds and the AFL control
indicator B fla shes for app rox .
4 seconds.
After the change, AFL control indicator B
flashes for approx. 4 seconds each time the
ignition is switc hed on.
To return to asy mmetrica l dipped beam,
pull the main b eam stalk tow ards the
steering wheel aga in and hold , switch on
the ignition and wait for the a coustic
signal. AFL control indica tor B will then
discontinue flashing.
Control indica tor B see page 109.
114 In fotain men t System

Infotainment System Radio reception 3

Vehicle radio reception differs from
domestic radio reception:
As the v ehicle antenna is relatively near the
ground, the broadcasting compa nies
cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of
reception a s obtained with a d om estic
ra dio using an ov erhead antenna.
z C hanges in distance from the
transm itter,
z multi-path rec eption due to reflection
Radio reception 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 114 and
Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 114 z sha dowing
Remote control on steering wheel 3 . . 114 may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss
Twin Audio 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 115 of reception a ltogether. Picture no: 14034s.tif
AUX input 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 115 Remo te control o n steering
Electronic data ac quisition in toll In fotain men t system 3 wheel 3
sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 115 The Infotainm ent system is operated as The functions of the Infotainment system 3
Mobile telephones a nd radio described in the operating instructions. and the informa tion display can be
equipment 3. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 116 operated v ia the b uttons on the steering
wheel.
Further information see page 96 and the
relevant operating instructions.

Pict ure no: 14035s.t if
Twin Audio 3 AUX inpu t 3
Twin Audio provides rear seat occupa nts
with the opportunity to listen to a different
audio source than the one selected by the
driver on the Infotainment system.
O nly an audio source that is not currently
active on the I nfotainment system can be
controlled using Twin Audio.
Two headphone connections are availab le,
with separate volume controls.
Further information is available in the
Infotainm ent system operating
instructions.
Picture no: 18473s.tif
The AUX input is next to the handbrak e in
the centre console.
An externa l audio source, e.g. a portable
CD play er, can be connected via the AUX
input.
Alw ays keep the AUX input clean and d ry.
Further inform ation is av ailable in the
Infotainment sy stem opera ting
instructions.
Infotainment System 115
Picture no: 14033s.tif
Electronic data acquisitio n in to ll
systems 3
In v ehicles with a heat-reflecting
windscreen 3 1 ), attach c hipca rd 3 for
electronic data a cquisition and fee
pay ment in b la ck area of windscreen on
left or rig ht-hand side, behind the interior
mirror. S ee markings in illustration.
Attaching the c hipca rd outside this area
ma y cause d ata acquisition m alfunctions.
1)
Sola r Reflect.
116 In fotain men t System

Mobile telephones and radio Operation of a hands-free device without

equipment 3
The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and
the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the
telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed
when fitting and operating a m ob ile
telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te
the vehicles operating perm it (EU Directiv e
95/54/EG).
Recommended conditions for fault-free
opera tion:
z Professionally installed exterior a ntenna
to ob ta in the max imum range possible.
z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt.
externa l antenna, with m ob ile phone
standard GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS,
is p ermitted only if the m aximum
tra nsmission power of the phone does not
exc eed 2 Watt for GSM 900 a nd otherwise
1 Watt. The instructions of the
manufac turer of the telephone and
ha nds-free device must b e observ ed in a ll
cases.
For rea sons of safety , we recomm end that
you do not use the p hone while driving.
Even use of a hands-free set can be a
distraction while driving. Be sure to observe
any country -specific reg ulations.
9 Warnin g
Mobile p hones and radios c an cause
malfunctions of the vehicle electronics
when operated inside the vehicle without
an ex ternal antenna, unless the
instructions above are observed.
Mobile phones which do not com ply with
the abov e standards, and rad ios, m ay
only be used with antennae installed on
the outside of the vehicle.

z Installation of the telephone in a suitab le

spot (see informa tion on pag e 75).
O btain advice on pred eterm ined
installation locations for the ex ternal
antenna and equipment holder and w ays
of using devices with transmission power of
more tha n 10 Watts.
We recommend that you consult y our
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will
have brackets and various installation kits
ava ilab le as ac cessories and will install
them in accordance with regulations.
 Climate Control 117

Climate Control

Heating and ventila tion system, air

cond itioning system 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . 117
Electronic Climate Control system 3 . . 117
Air vents .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 118 Picture no: 14154s.tif Picture no: 16499s.tif
Heated rear window, heated ex terior Heating and ventilation system, Electronic Climate Control
mirrors 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 119 air conditioning system 3 system 3
Heated seats 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 119 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re O ffers the greatest comfort in the vehicle
Cooled glove compartment 3 .. .... ..... . 119 combined into one unit that is d esigned to interior regardless of the conditions
Heating and ventila tion system ... ..... . 120 prov ide com fort regardless of the season, outside.
weather or outside temperature.
Air conditioning system 3 ..... .... .... ..... . 123 To ensure a uniform a nd comforta ble
Electronic Climate Control system 3 . . 126 When cooling 3 is activated, the air is climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
Air intake . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 cooled and dried. inflowing air, airflow rate and air
Air outlet.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 distribution are automatically adapted
The heating unit heats the air a s required in
based on the clima te conditions outside
Pollen filter .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 all operating m od es depending on the
the v ehicle a nd the current temperature of
Note .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 position of the tempera ture sw itc h.
the vehicle interior.
Maintenance ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 The air supply ca n be adjusted to suit
requirements by means of the fan. Electronic Clima te C ontrol system 3 -
see page 126.
The buttons for cooling n and a ir
recirculation 4 are only found on m odel
variants w ith a ir cond itioning system 3.
Air conditioning system 3 - see page 123.
118 Climate Control

Ad ditional vents
Located beneath the windscreen and side
windows and in the front footwell.

Pict ure no: 16112s.t if Picture no: 14576s.tif

Air vents To close the air v ents, turn the adjustm ent
Pleasant ventilation to the head area wheel fully downwards.
controlled by the position of the Wi nd sc reen defroster nozzles (2)
tem perature switch. Air distribution switch set to V or J:
To increase the air supply, turn the fan all Air is directed onto the windsc reen a nd
the w ay up a nd set the a ir distribution door wind ow s.
switch to M or L.
Centre and sid e (1) air v ents
To open air vent:
Turn vertical a djuster wheel up .
Adjust the direction of airflow by turning
the horiz ontal and v ertical adjuster wheels.

Pict ure no: 13992s.t if
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors 3
With the ignition on, the rear window and
exterior mirror heating is switched on b y
pressing button :
LED illuminated:
rea r window and exterior mirror hea ting.
LED not illuminated: rear wind ow and
exterior mirror heating is switched off.
Heating works with the engine running and
is switched off automatically after approx.
15 minutes.
Dep ending on engine, cleaning the diesel
particle filter 3 automa tica lly switches on
the heated rear window.
Picture no: 14153s.tif
Heated seats 3
Tw o pushb uttons between the centre air
vents.
When the ignition is switched on, the sea t
heating is activated by pushing the
button :
LED illum ina ted: seat heating on.
LED not illum inated: sea t heating off.
Climate Control 119
Picture no: 14320s.tif
Cooled glove compartment 3
C ool air is routed to the glove
compa rtm ent.
If g lov e com partment cooling is not
required, slide cover downwards.
General in formation and
information on air in take,
air outlet, pollen filter and
maintenance,
see page 131.
120 Climate Control

Pict ure no: 14144s.t if Picture no: 14145s.tif
Heatin g and ventilation system Centre rotary knob: Quanti ty of a ir
Left -hand rota ry k nob : Temperature Four fan speeds:
Red area = Warm x O ff
Blue area = C old 4 M aximum rate of airflow
The rate of airflow is determ ined by the
fa n. The fan should therefore a lso be
switched on during a journey.
Picture no: 14146s.tif
Rig ht-hand rot ary k nob: Air distribut ion
V Towa rd s w indscreen and
front door windows
J Towa rd s w indscreen,
front door windows and footwell
K Towa rd s footwell
L Towa rd s head area and footwell
M Towa rd s head area
O pen the air vents when the switch is
set to L or M.

Pict ure no: 14150s.t if
Vent ilation
z Set the tem perature to the desired
setting,
z Switch fan on, adjust fan setting as
desired,
z For max imum ventilation in head area:
set air distribution switch to M and open
all air vents,
z For ventila tion to footwell:
Set air distribution sw itch to K,
z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d
area a nd the footwell:
Set air distribution sw itch to L.
Climate Control 121
Hea ting The c om fort and general well-being of the
The amount of heat is dependent on the vehicle occupants are to a large extent
coolant temperature and is thus not fully dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd
attained until the engine is warm. hea ting setting.
For rapid warming of the p assenger To achieve stratification of temperature
compartment: with a pleasant "cool head and warm feet"
effect, set the rotary air d istribution
z Turn the temperature switch clockw ise as
switch to K, J or L, set tem perature
far as it will g o.
rotary knob to a ny position (in centre range
z Set the fan to speed 3. with temperature stratification effect).
z Set air distribution switch to desired
position, preferab ly position J ,
see page 120.
Vehicles with Quickheat 3:
Depend ing on the outside tem perature
and the engine tempera ture, the
passenger com partment is heated up more
quic kly using an auxiliary elec tric heater.
The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
on a utoma tica lly .
122 Climate Control

z Set fa n to 3 or 4.
z Set air distribution switch to V.
z Switch on heated rear window .
z Open sid e air vents as required and
direct them towards door windows.
z For simultaneous footwell heating, set
air distribution switch to J.

Pict ure no: 14151s.t if Picture no: 16481s.tif

Heating the foot well
z Set the tem perature switch to the
red zone.
z Switch on fan.
z Set air distribution sw itch to K.
Dem ist ing and defr ost ing wind ow s
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions could lead
to misting or icing of the w indows and
sub sequent accidents due to imp aired
visibility.

Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p

weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e
temperatures are low :
z Turn the temperature switch clockw ise as
far as it will g o (warm).
 Climate Control 123

Air conditioning system 3

As a supplement to the heating and
ventilation system, the air c onditioning
system c ools and dehumidifies (dries)
inflowing air.
If cooling or dehum id ification is not
desired, switch off cooling in order to sa ve
fuel.
Cooling switches off autom atically at low
outside tem peratures.

Picture no: 14159s.tif Picture no: 14158s.tif

Cooling n Air rec irculati on system 4
Operation only if engine is running and fa n The air recirculation button 4 is used to
is switched on: set the ventilation system to air
On = Press n recirc ulation mode (control indica tor in
Off = Press n again button).

Control indica tor in the button. If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate

When cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is active, the air is cooled and
dehumidified. If cooling or
dehumidification is not desired, switch off
cooling in order to save fuel.
from outside: Temporarily switch on air
recirc ulation system 4.
To increa se the cooling power at high
outside temperatures, temporarily switch
on the air recirculation sy stem.

Cooling switches off automatically at low 6

outside temperatures.
124 Climate Control

The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the

entry of outside air and the air in the
passenger com partment is recirculated.
The humidity inc reases, and the windows
can m ist up. The quality of the passenger
compartment air deteriorates which may
cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy .
Air distrib ution to V:
The a ir recirculation sy stem is
automatically switched off, to speed up
window demisting and prev ent fogging.

Picture no: 14160s.tif Picture no: 14162s.tif

Comfort sett ing Ma xim um cooling
z Set cooling n as desired. Briefly open w indows, sunroof and tilting
roof 3 so tha t warm air c an escape quic kly.
z Air rec irculation system 4 off.
z Cooling n on.
z Set temperature switch a s d esired.
z Air recirculation sy stem 4 on.
z Sw itch on fan to d esired speed.
z Turn the temp erature switch
z Set air distribution switch to M or L .
antic lock wise as far as it will go (c old).
z O pen or ad just air vents as required.
z Set fa n to 4.
Temperature switch in centre of
z Set air distribution switch to M.
adjustment range: warmer air will flow into
the footwell and cooler air into the upper z Open all air v ents.
zone, with warm er air coming from the side
air vents and cooler air from the centre air
vents.

Pict ure no: 16482s.t if
Demisting a nd defrosting w indows
9 Warning
Disreg ard of these instructions could lead
to misting or icing of the windows and
subsequent accidents due to impaired
visibility.
Misted or ic y windows, such as in damp
weather, from wet clothes or w hen outside
tem peratures are low:
Climate Control 125
z C ooling n on,
the air cond itioning compressor
deactivates a utomatically when outside
temperatures are low (icing),
z Turn the temperature sw itch c lock wise,
z Set fan to 3 or 4,
z Air distrib ution switch to V;
air recircula tion system 4
automatically switches off,
or
if there is still moisture in the system after
previous air c onditioning operation, the
windows may mist up. To prevent this,
set air distribution to K before starting
eng ine and set to V approx. 5 sec onds
after starting,
z Activate heated rear window ,
z O pen side air vents as required and
direct them towa rd s the sid e windows.
126 Climate Control

Electronic Climate Control

system 3
Provides the greatest amount of comfort in
the interior regardless of the weather,
outside tem perature or season.
To ensure a constant and com fortable
climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of
the inflowing air, the airflow rate a nd the
air distrib ution are cha nged automatically
according to clim atic conditions outside
the v ehicle.
The c lim ate is regula ted automatically
based on persona l setting s.
Picture no: 16500s.tif Picture no:
Temperature changes d ue to external When set to automa tic mode, the
influences, such as direct sunlight, are Electronic Climate Control system p rov ides
autom atic ally compensated. the op tim al settings for a lmost all
conditions. If necessary, settings ca n be
When cooling (air conditioning
modified manually.
compressor) is active, a ir is cooled and
dehumidified. The Elec tronic C limate Control system is
only operational when the engine is
The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen
running.
and spores from the inflowing outside air.
C ooling (air conditioning compressor)
switches off autom atically at low outside
temperatures.
 Climate Control 127

Switching off the air conditioning Temperat ur e p reset

compressor (ECO appears in displa y) can
ha ve a detrimental effect on comfort and
safety see p age 129.
All air vents are actuated autom atically in
autom atic mode. The a ir vents should
therefore always be open see page 118.
The left rotary knob can be used to set the
temperature to values of between 16 C
and 28 C .
For the sake of comfort, only change the
preselected temperature in sm all steps.
Vehicles with Q uickheat 3:
Depending on the outside temperature
and the engine temp erature, the
passenger compartment is heated up more
quickly using an a ux iliary electric hea ter.
The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
on automatically.

Pict ure no: 16496s.t if If the temp erature setting is less

Autom atic m ode than 16 C, LO appears in the air
Basic setting for max imum comfort: conditioning display : The Electronic
C lim ate C ontrol system runs consta ntly at
z Press AUTO button.
ma ximum cooling power, and the
z Open all air vents. temperature is not regulated.
z Air conditioning compressor activation If the temp erature setting is ab ov e 28 C ,
see pa ge 129. HI appears in the air conditioning display :
z Preset tem perature to 22 C with rotary The Electronic Climate Control system runs
consta ntly at max imum hea ting power,
knob .
and the tem perature is not regula ted.
The temp erature can be set higher or low er
as desired.
128 Climate Control

Manual sett ings The temperature, a ir distribution and fan

Under certain circumstances (e. g. iced or are set autom atically, windows are quick ly
misted wind ow s), the functions of the demisted a nd de-iced.
Electronic Climate Control system ca n be To return to automatic m ode:
modified manually. Press button V or AUTO.
Make ma nual settings as follow s w hen Heated rear w indow see page 130.
necessary:

Picture no: 16501s.tif

Wi nd ow demi st ing and d efrosting

9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impa ired
visibility.

Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p

weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e
temperatures are low :
Press button V, V appears in the air
conditioning display.

Pict ure no: 16503s.t if
Acti vati ng and d eac tiva ting ai r
condit ioning com pressor
Press the ECO button. EC O ap pears in the
air conditioning display .
Switch on to save fuel. In this m od e, the
cooling (air conditioning comp ressor) is
switched off.
Inflowing air is neither cooled nor
dehumid ified. This restricts the level of
comfort prov ided by the Electronic Climate
Control system. This may cause the
windows to mist up, for example.
To return to cooling operation:
Press EC O button. ECO goes out.
Picture no: 16504s.tif
Air distri bution
Press one or more of the following buttons.
The corresponding sy mbol app ears in the
air conditioning display:
s Air distrib ution towards windscreen
and front door windows.
M Air distrib ution towards vehic le
occupants via ad justable air vents.
K Air distrib ution towards footwell.
To return to autom atic mode:
Press the appropriate buttons again,
or press AUTO.
Climate Control 129
Picture no: 16505s.tif
Airfl ow
S et airflow using the right-ha nd rota ry
knob. The selected fan speed is indicated
by the number of bars.
To deactivate the fan and thereby the
Electronic Clima te C ontrol system:
Turn the right-hand rotary knob
anticlockwise until the display goes out.
S witc hing on: Turn rotary k nob clockwise.
To return to automatic m ode:
Press the AUTO button.
130 Climate Control
Pict ure no: 16506s.t if
Manual air recirc ulation m ode
The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the
entry of outside air and the air in the
passenger com partment is recirculated.
Press button 4 , % appears in the air
conditioning d isplay .
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
recirculation mode. The quality of the
passenger com partment a ir deteriorates
which may cause the vehicle occupants to
feel drowsy. I n op eration without c ooling,
the a ir humid ity increases, so the wind ow s
may mist up. C onseq uently , the air
recirculation sy stem should only b e run for
short periods of tim e.
To switch off a ir recirculation:
Press button 4 again.
Picture no: 16507s.tif
Air condit ioning wi th the eng ine not
runni ng
When the vehicle is stop ped and the
ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still
in the sy stem can b e used to condition the
passenger compa rtm ent, for example
when stop ped at a level crossing.
Press AUTO with the ig nition off. The
preselected tem perature appears in the air
conditioning display . The tem perature can
be adjusted with the left-hand rotary knob.
The air conditioning will operate for a
lim ited p eriod of time.
To deactiv ate air conditioning:
Press the AUTO button.
Picture no: 16502s.tif
Heated r ear window ,
heated exter ior mirror s 3
With the ignition on, the rear window and
exterior mirror hea ting is ac tiv ated by
pressing button , the a ir cond itioning
display shows .
The rear window a nd ex terior mirrors w ill
quickly be cleared of ice and cond ensa tion.
Heating w orks with the engine running and
is switched off a utomatica lly after approx.
15 minutes.
Depending on eng ine, cleaning the diesel
particle filter 3 autom atically switches on
the heated rear w indow.

Pict ure no: 14147s.t if
Air intake
The air intakes in front of the wind screen on
the far right a nd left sides of the engine
compartment must be kept clear to a llow
air intak e. Rem ove any leav es, d irt or snow.
Air outlet
Do not cover the air outlets when stowing
item s in the luggage compartment
stow age com partments.
Pollen filter
The pollen filter cleans the air entering from
outside and filters dust, soot, pollen and
spores from the interior air if the air
recirculation system 3 is active. The activ e
carbon layer 3 eliminates most odours and
ha rm ful a mbient ga ses from the air.
Have the pollen filter repla ced a t the
intervals specified in the Service Booklet.
Note
If the windscreen is m isted-up due to damp
weather, tem pora rily set the sy stem as
described und er "Window demisting and
defrosting", see pages 122, 125.
Cooling 3 works most efficiently when the
wind ow s, sunroof and tilting roof 3 are
closed. If the passenger com partment has
heated up considerably after a long period
in direc t sunlight, briefly open the windows,
sunroof and tilting roof 3 so tha t warm air
can escape quickly.
Climate Control 131
When cooling 3 (a ir conditioning
compressor) is switched on, condensation
forms, w hich is ex pelled from the und ersid e
of the vehicle.
At least one air vent must be open while
cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is
on, in order to prevent the evaporator from
icing up d ue to lack of air movement.
C ooling switches off automatically a t low
outside temperatures.
For trouble-free operation of the Electronic
C lim ate Control system 3, do not cov er the
sensor loc ated b etween the air vents
beneath the wind screen.
Maintenance
For consistently good operation, the a ir
conditioning compressor 3 must be
switched on for sev eral m inutes once per
month, regardless of the weather and the
time of year. O peration with the air
conditioning compressor switched on 3 is
not possible at low outsid e temperatures.
For faults, c ontact a workshop.
132 Drivin g and Operation

Driving and Operation Easytronic 3

The semi-automatic Easytronic 3
tra nsmission permits manua l (Manua l
mode) or a utomatic (Automatic m ode)
gearshifting, both with automa tic clutch
control.

9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions m ay lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Ea sy tronic 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 132
Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 138
Sav ing fuel, p rotecting the
environment . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 140 Picture no: 17878s.tif
Transmi ssion di sp lay
Fuel consump tion .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 142
S hows the mode or current gear.
Fuel . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 142
Fuel filler ca p... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143
Refuelling . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143
Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases... . 145
Drive Control System s .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 149
Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 154
Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS) ... .... ..... . 156
Wheels, ty res ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 158
Roof racks 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 163
Towing eq uipm ent 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 163
Towing eq uipm ent with removable
coup ling ball bar 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 163
Ca ra van / trailer towing ... ..... .... .... ..... . 166

Pict ure no: 18386s.t if
Sta rting t he engine
When starting the engine, app ly the
footb rake at the same time. The engine
can only b e started in position N a nd with
the footbrake applied. The transmission
display shows "N" .
If the footbrak e is not applied, the control
indicator j in the instrum ent cluster
illuminates and "N " flashes in the
transm ission display; the engine cannot be
started.
Also the vehic le cannot be sta rted if all
brake lights ha ve fa iled.
Picture no: 14175s.tif
Easytronic operation via the selector lever
Alw ays move the selector lever all the w ay
to the stop . Note the gear or mode
indica tor in the transmission d isplay .
Move sel ect or lever towa rd N
Neutral.
Driving an d Operation 133
Selector lev er in o (centre position)
O nce the selector lever ha s b een moved
from N to position o (centre position) w ith
the footbrake app lied, the Ea sy tronic is in
Automatic mode and first gea r has been
selected (second gear with winter
programm e enabled ). "A" a ppears in the
transmission displa y.
When the footbrake is released, the vehic le
starts to "creep". If the footbrake is not
app lied, "A" flashes. Start off by pressing
the accelerator immediately or move
selector lever back to N a nd repeat
procedure with footbrake applied.
S hifting to different gears takes place
automatically in Automatic mode,
depending on the driving conditions.
134 Drivin g and Operation
Pict ure no: 14175s.t if
Selector l ev er i n A/M
Switch b etween Automatic and M anual
mode.
In Manual m od e, gears can be selected
manually by moving the selector lever to
or - . The current gear is indicated in the
transm ission display .
If the engine speed is too low, the
Ea sy tronic will a utomatica lly shift to a
lower gear even in Manual mode. This
prevents the engine from stalling .
Selec tor lever in + or - Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing
+ Shift to a higher gear. pr og ramm es in Aut omati c mode
z By m eans of delay ed gear cha nging
- Shift to a lower gear.
(higher engine speed s) following a cold
If a higher g ear is selected when the start, the opera ting temperature
running speed is too low, or a lower gear programme quickly and automatically
when the speed is too high, no shift is bring s the catalytic conv erter to the
effected. This prev ents the engine from temperature required for optimum
running at too low or too high rev s. pollutant reduction.
Gears can be skipped by jog ging the z Adaptive programmes autom atically
selector lev er repeatedly at short intervals. adapt gearshifting to suit the driving
When the vehicle is in Automatic mode, cond itions, suc h as if the vehic le is
Easytronic shifts to Manual mode by tow ing a carav an / trailer, has a high
moving the selector lever to position + or -. payload, or is being driv en on inclines.
The current gear is indicated in the
tra nsmission display.
Selec tor lever in R
Reverse gear. Eng age only when vehicle is
stationary.
+ Press button on selector lever, selec t R.
The transm ission display shows "R ".
If R is selected w hen the vehic le is in motion,
"R" flashes in the transm ission display and
no g ear is eng aged.

Pict ure no: 17889s.t if
Winter progr amme T
In the event of diffic ulties starting-off on
slip pery roads, press button T ("A" and T
appear in the tra nsmission display).
Ea sy tronic switches to Automatic mode
and the vehicle sets off in second gea r.
The w inter programme is sw itc hed off by:
z Pressing button T again,
z Switching to Manual mode,
z Turning off the ignition.
In order to protect the Easytronic, the
winter p rogram me autom atically switches
itself off at extremely high clutch
tem peratures.
Picture no: 13322a.tif
Kick down
Ac celera tor pedal pressed past the
pressure point: below certain speeds, the
tra nsmission shifts down into a lower gear.
Full engine power is a vailable for
acceleration.
During kickdown, no manual gearshifting is
possible.
When the engine speed approaches its
up per limit, the transm ission shifts to a
higher gea r during kickdown, even in
Manua l mode.
Without kickdown, this automatic shift is
not effected in Manual mode.
Driving an d Operation 135
Brak ing assistance from eng ine
Automatic mode:
When driving d ow nhill, Ea sytronic does not
shift into higher g ears until a fairly high
eng ine speed has been rea ched. When
brak ing, Easytronic shifts down in good
time.
Manual m od e:
To utilise the engine braking effect, selec t a
lower gear in good time when driving
downhill.
" Rocking" the vehicle
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole,
mov e the selector lever between o (c entre
position) and R in a repeat pattern while
app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
sudden a cceleration.
This applies only to the ex ceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
136 Drivin g and Operation
Pictu re no: 14083j.tif
Manoeuvri ng the vehicle
For accurate m anoeuvring when pa rk ing ,
at ga ra ge entranc es etc. , the creeping
movement c an be utilised by releasing the
footb rake with a gear selected.
Never actuate a ccelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
In ord er to prevent damag e, the Easytronic
disengages the "creep function" at
extremely high automatic c lutch
tem peratures.
Stopp ing the vehicle
In Automa tic or Manual mode, when the
vehicle has stopp ed, first g ear (with Winter
mode engaged, sec ond gear) is eng aged
autom atic ally and the clutch released.
In R, reverse remains enga ged.
If a warning signal sounds when the
drivers door is opened (footbrake not
applied), move the selector lev er to N and
apply the handbrake.
When stopping on grad ients, apply the
ha ndb ra ke or footbrake. To prevent
ov erheating of the clutch, do not increase
engine speed, to ensure smooth idling
when in gear.
To prevent damag e to the Easytronic, the
clutch is closed autom atically at high
clutch temperatures.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at lev el
crossings.
Vehicle storage
Before lea ving the v ehicle:
z Apply handbrak e,
z Remov e ignition key.
The most recently eng aged gear (indicator
in transm ission display ) rema ins enga ged.
With N, no g ear is eng aged.
When the ignition is switched off, the
Easy tronic no longer respond s to
mov ement of the selector lever.
If the ignition k ey is not removed , the
battery may be discharged if the vehicle is
then left to sta nd for a lengthy p eriod of
time.
If the handbrake has not b een applied,
control ind icator R flashes for a few
seconds after the ignition is switched off.

Pict ure no: 17890s.t if
Fault
If a fa ult occ urs in the Easytronic, control
indicator A illuminates. In the event of
serious faults, "F" a lso app ears in the
transm ission display .
It is possible to continue driving if only
control indica tor A illuminates. Ma nual
mode can then no longer be selected.
If "F" also ap pears in the transmission
display, it is not possib le to continue
driving.
Hav e the cause of the fault elim inated by a
workshop. The self-diag nosis integrated
into the system allow s rap id fault
identification.
Picture no: 14721s.tif
Interruption of p ower supply
The clutch is not d iseng aged if the vehicle
battery is discha rg ed and a gear has been
selected. The vehicle cannot move.
If the ba ttery is flat, start the v ehicle using
jump lead s see page 172.
If the cause of the power failure is not a
discharged battery , conta ct a workshop. If
the vehicle m ust be rem ov ed from flowing
tra ffic, relea se the c lutch as follows:
1. Apply handbrak e and switch off ignition.
2. O pen bonnet and engag e support.
Driving an d Operation 137
3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see
illustration in prev ious c olumn) so that no
dirt can get into the opening w hen the
cap is rem oved.
4. Rotate ca p to sla cken a nd remove by
lifting upwa rd s see illustration in
previous column.
5. Turn the adjusting screw clock wise using
a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3
see page 176) until clear resistanc e can
be felt. The clutch has now been
disengaged.
Do not turn bey ond the resistance, since
this can d amage the Easytronic.
6. Fit cleaned cap ag ain. The cap must be
in full contact w ith the housing.
Towing the vehic le and starting the eng ine
is not perm itted when the clutch has been
released in this way , although the vehicle
can b e m ov ed a short distance.
C ontact a workshop immediately.
138 Drivin g and Operation
Driving hints
The first 600 mil es (1000 k m)
Drive your vehicle at v arious speeds.
Do not use full throttle. Never allow the
engine to labour at low revs.
Make good use of all gea rs.
Dep ress the acc elerator pedal a maxim um
of approx. three quarters of the av ailable
pedal travel in all gears.
Do not drive faster than three quarters of
max imum speed.
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the
first 125 miles (200 km ).
Never coa st with engine not running
Many units will not function in this situation
(e. g. brak e serv o unit, Elec tric Power
Steering (EPS ) 3). Driving in this manner is
a d ang er to y ourself and others.
Brak e servo unit
When the engine is not running, the brake
servo unit is no longer effective once the
footb rake has been depressed onc e or
twice. Braking effect is not reduced, b ut
significantly greater force is required for
braking.
Electri c Power Steering (EPS) 3
If the Electric Power Steering fails when
being towed with the engine switched off,
the vehicle can still be steered, but
considera bly more forc e is req uired.
Dr iving in mountainous terrai n or with a
carav an / trail er
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
cooling p ow er is therefore independent of
the engine speed.
Since a considerable amount of heat is
genera ted at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when
climbing hills w hile the v ehicle is still c op ing
with the gradient in the higher g ear.
Dr iving with a roof load
Do not exceed the permissible roof load ,
see p age 214. For reasons of safety,
distribute the load evenly and secure it
prop erly w ith retaining straps.
Ad just tyre pressure to load conditions.
Do not d riv e faster than 75 mph
(120 km /h). Check and retighten the stra ps
frequently. Observ e country-specific
regulations.
Sw itching off the engi ne
When y ou switch off, fans in the eng ine
compa rtm ent may continue running for a
time to cool the engine.
If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
after driving in mountainous terrain:
Allow the engine to id le for approx .
two m inutes in order to prev ent heat
acc um ulation.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine:
After running at high eng ine speeds or high
eng ine loads, op erate the engine briefly at
a low load or run in neutral for approx.
30 seconds before switching off, in order to
protec t the turbocharger.
Sa ve energy m ore miles / kilom et res
Plea se observe the running-in hints on the
previous pa ge a nd the tips for energy
saving on the following pag es.
Good, technically correc t and ec onomical
driving ensures m aximum d urab ility and
performa nc e for your vehicle.

O verrun
The fuel supply is autom atically shut off
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or when
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to
take effect, do not acc elerate during
overrun and on m anual vehicles, do not
release the clutc h. To prev ent dam age to
the c atalytic converter, overrun cut-off is
tem porarily deactivated when the catalytic
converter tem perature is high.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine:
Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if
the a ccelerator is released quickly, on
account of airflow in the turbocharger.
Eng ine sp eed
Drive in a low engine speed range for each
gear as much as possible.
Warmi ng up
Allow the engine to warm up while driving.
Do not w arm it up by letting it run at idling
speed. Do not app ly full throttle until the
engine has reached operating
tem perature.
After a cold sta rt, the Easytronic 3 does
not sw itc h to higher gea rs until the speed
increases when it is in Automatic mode.
This a llows the catalytic c onverter to
quickly reach the temp erature that is
req uired for optimum emission reduction.
Correct g ear selection
Do not ra ce y our engine while the
tra nsmission is in neutral or with a low gea r
selected. Driving too fast in individual
gears as well as stop-and-go traffic
increases engine wear and fuel
consumption.
Change dow n
When decreasing speed, shift down into
the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch
with a high-revving engine. This is
especially important when hill climb ing.
Clutch op era tion
Alw ays dep ress the clutch ped al hard to
the floor to prev ent shifting difficulties and
tra nsmission dam age.
When driving, do not use the ped al as a
footrest; this will cause substantial clutch
wear.
Driving an d Operation 139
C ool ing fan
The cooling fan is controlled v ia a
therm oswitch and therefore only runs if
nec essary .
Depending on eng ine, cleaning the diesel
particle filter 3 autom atically switches on
the cooling fan.
Pedals
Do not place any ob jects in the footwell
which could slip under the ped als and
inhibit the pedal trav el.
To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
there must be no mats in the area of the
pedals.
Bat tery ca re
When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is
stationary , e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop-
and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all
unnecessary electrical load s w here
possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated
front seats, etc. ).
Declutch w hen sta rting, in ord er to relieve
the strain on the starter and the ba ttery.
140 Drivin g and Operation
Saving fuel, protecting th e
environment
Trend-set ting technology
In the dev elopment and manufacture of
your vehicle, environment-friendly and in
the m ain recy clable materials were used.
The p roduction method s used to make
your vehicle are likewise env ironmentally -
compatible.
Recycling of production wastes keeps the
circulation of material closed. Reduction of
energy a nd water requirements a lso help s
to conserve natural resources.
A highly adv anced design mea ns that your
vehic le can be easily disassembled at the
end of its working life, and the individual
materials separated for subsequent re-use.
Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium
are not used . The refrigerant in the air
conditioning system 3 is C FC -free.
New painting techniques employ water as
a solvent.
End-of-Life vehicle recov ery
For detailed information on Va ux ha ll s
on-going comm itment to achieving an
environmentally susta inab le future,
including; design for recycling, take back of
End-of-Life Vehicles (ELVs) and the
recycling of ELVs, view
www.va ux ha ll. co.uk/recycling for details.
Energy and environm ent-c onsci ous
drivi ng
z High noise levels and exhaust em issions
are often a result of driving w ithout due
attention to saving energy and
protecting the environment.
z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in
mind "more m iles / k ilom etres less fuel".
Reduce the noise level and exhaust
emissions b y adopting an environment-
consc ious driving style. This is ex tremely
worthwhile and im proves the quality of
life.
Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great
extent on your own personal d riv ing
style. The following hints are intended to
help you consume fuel at a rate that is as
close as possible to the specified levels
see page 212.
C heck y our v ehicle s fuel consumption
every time you refuel. This facilitates
early detection of any irregula rities
causing increased fuel consumption.
Warm ing up
z Full throttle and w arming up at idle
speed increase w ear, fuel consumption,
ex haust em ission, the am ount of
pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount
of noise.
z Driv e off imm ediately after starting.
Wa rm up the engine b y running it at
moderate eng ine speeds.
Uniform speed
z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
consumption, the ex haust emissions, the
proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
gas and the noise level.
z Do not accelerate a nd brake
unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed,
watching the road.
Avoid freq uent starting-off and stopping
e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance
tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans
of clever planning . Select road s w ith
good traffic flow .
I dling
z The eng ine also consumes fuel when
idling .
z If you have to wait for more than one
minute, it is worthwhile switching off the
engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling
corresponds to ap prox imately 0.6 miles
(one kilometre) of driving.

O verrun
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off
during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or
when braking see page 139.
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come
into action and sav e fuel, do not
accelerate or d eclutch during overrun.
Corr ect gear sel ec tion
z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel
consumption.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at
high engine speeds.
Making use of the tachom eter helps to
save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed
ra nge for each gear as much a s possible
with uniform engine speeds. Drive as
often as possible in top gear, select the
next higher gear a s soon as possible,
and only chang e down when the engine
is no longer running perfectly smoothly .
High speed
z The higher the speed , the higher the
consumption and the noise level. At top
speed, you consume a great deal of fuel
and produce excessive noise and
exhaust em issions.
z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al
results in distinct fuel savings with no
major loss of speed.
Drive at no more tha n approx. three
quarters of max imum speed and you will
use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a
great deal of time.
Tyre pressure
z Inadequate ty re p ressure, leading to
higher road resistance, costs m oney in
two wa ys: for more fuel and increased
tyre wear.
z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off.
Electri cal loa ds
z The power consum ption of electrical
equip ment increa ses fuel consumption.
z Sw itch off all aux iliary electrical loads
(e. g. air c onditioning 3, heated rear
window) when not needed.
Roof rack s, sk i-holders
z Due to air resistance, a roof load can
increase fuel consump tion by approx.
3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km ).
z Remove them if they are not being used.
Driving an d Operation 141
Repai r and m aintenance
z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and
maintenance work can increase fuel
consumption. Do not carry out w ork on
the eng ine yourself.
You may , out of ignoranc e, infringe
environmental law s b y not disposing of
materials properly.
Appropriate parts might not b e recycled.
Contact with some of the materia ls
inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard.
z We recom mend that repair and
maintenance be entrusted to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Extr em e d riving conditions
z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
on poor road s a nd winter driving a ll
increase fuel consumption.
Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically
in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter
temperatures, especially on short trip s
when the engine operating tempera ture
is not reached.
z Follow the hints given above to keep
consumption to a m inimum under suc h
cond itions.
142 Drivin g and Operation
Fuel consumption
Fuel consump tion is determined und er
specific driv ing cond itions see page 212.
Special equipment increases the weight of
the v ehicle. As a result, they can increase
fuel consump tion and reduce the specified
max imum speed.
For the first few thousand m iles /
kilometres, friction between the engine and
transm ission com ponents is higher. This
increases fuel consumption.
Fuel
Fuel for petrol engines
Normal c om mercial high-quality fuels with
a m aximum ethanol content of 5% in
accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable
(for catalytic converter see pag e 145, for
octane numbers see page 208). The
quality thereof has considerable effect on
the p erformance, running and serv ice life
of the engine. The additives mix ed with the
fuel are extremely im portant. For this
rea son you must only refuel with high-
quality fuels containing additives.
Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5%
do not comply w ith DI N EN 228 a nd must
not b e used unless the v ehicle ha s b een
specifically develop ed a nd approved for
these fuels.
Fuel with too low an octane number can
cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held
lia ble for resulting dama ge.
Petrol with a higher octane number can
always be used.
Do not use 91 octane petrol in v ehicles with
the Z 16 LET 1) engine.
The ignition tim ing is a utoma tica lly
adjusted according to the grade of fuel
used (octane number) see page 208.
Use of petrol w ith a n oc ta ne rating of 95
will ensure economica l driving.
For vehicles with Z 16 LET 1) engine, use of
95 RO N fuel reduces p erform ance a nd
torque.
1)
Sales d esigna tion s ee p a ge 208.
Fuel for diesel engi nes
Diesel engines m ust be operated only on
comm ercially av ailable diesel fuel meeting
the specifications of DIN EN 590.
S ince Ja nuary 2004, some oil comp anies
have mix ed their diesel fuel with up to 5%
Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in
acc orda nce with the current DIN EN 590
and d oes not ha rm the fuel injection
system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel
mix ed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not
differ from conventional diesel fuel and do
not influence the vehicles driveability.
I mporta nt: Diesel fuel m ixed with 5% FAM E
acc ording to DI N EN 590 m ust not be
confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not
to be used in Vauxhall eng ines.
The flow and filterability of diesel fuel a re
temperature-dependent.
Diesel fuels w ith improved low temp erature
properties are therefore a vailable on the
ma rk et during the winter months. Make
sure that y ou fill the tank with winter fuel
before the start of the cold weather
season.
Additives can be used with diesel fuels with
winter prop erties that are guaranteed by
the manufa cturer and when using diesel
fuel filters that are heated depending on
the outside temperature.
Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels
that are intended for petrol eng ines.
 Driving an d Operation 143

Fuel filler cap

When rep la cing the fuel filler cap, be sure
9 Warnin g
to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your
Fuel is flam mable and explosiv e. When
model to ensure full functionality. Diesel-
ha nd ling fuel or when in the immediate
engined vehic les have special fuel filler
vicinity, avoid nak ed flames or sparks. Do
caps.
not smoke. This also applies where the
presence of fuel is rev ealed by its
characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in
the vehicle, hav e a workshop eliminate
the fault immediately .

Pict ure no: 15829t.tif

Refu elling
9 Warning
C are m ust be taken when handling fuel.
Before refuelling, turn off engine a nd also
shut off ex ternal heaters with c om bustion
chambers (id entified b y stickers on fuel
filler ca p). Switch off mobile phones.
144 Drivin g and Operation

Correct filling depends to a la rg e ex tent on

prop er operation of the fuel dispensing
pump:
1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it
on.
2. At the autom atic sw itc h-off, the
specified tank ca pacity is rea ched by
means of metered refuelling (twice).
Insert fuel d ispensing pump as far as
possible.
To close, place fuel filler cap in position and
turn, ov ercoming the resistance until the
ra tchet on the c ap enga ges audibly.

Pict ure no: 14191s.t if Close tank flap.

Fuel filler neck at right rear sid e of vehicle. Wipe off any overflowing fuel im media tely.
The tank fla p is locked together w ith the
doors see page 30.
O pen the tank flap.
To open, unscrew the fuel filler cap, remov e
and suspend from the tank flap.
The fuel tank has a limiting system whic h
prevents overfilling of the tank.
 Driving an d Operation 145

Damage to the ca talytic converter or the z If unb urned fuel enters the cataly tic
vehicle may result if the follow ing points conv erter, this may result in overheating
are not observed: and irreparable damage to the c atalytic
conv erter.
z O n ignition faults, uneven running after
cold start, a clear d rop-off in eng ine You should therefore av oid
power or other unusual opera ting unnecessarily long use of the starter
symptoms which could indica te a fault in when starting-off, running the tank d ry
the ig nition system, contac t a workshop (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to
immediately. C ontinue driving if overhea ting) and starting the engine by
necessary for a short time at low speed pushing or towing.
and low revs.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
eng ine power when the Electronic
Stab ility Prog ra mme ESP P lu s 3 comes
Pictur e no: 6448u.tif into action are due to the operating
Catalytic converter, exhaust conditions and are therefore of no
gases significance - see pag e 149.
Ca talytic conv er ter for petrol engines
Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic
converter and parts of the elec tronic
system, rendering them inoperative.
Use of high-quality fuels other than those
specified on page 142 (e. g. LRP 1) ) c ould
dam age the catalytic conv erter.

1)
LRP = L ea d Replacement P etrol.
146 Drivin g and Operation
z If the control ind icator Z flashes to
indica te emissions, back off until the
flashing stops and the control indica tor
illuminates. Contact a w orkshop
im med ia tely. Control ind ic ator for
emissions Z, see page 147.
Cata lyti c converter for d iesel engines
Damage to the ca talytic converter or the
vehicle may result if the follow ing points
are not observed:
z O n uneven running , a c lear drop-off in
eng ine power or other unusual operating
symptoms, c ontact a workshop
immediately. C ontinue driving if
necessary for a short time at low speed
and low revs.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
eng ine power when the Electronic
Stab ility Prog ra mme ES PP lu s 3 comes
into action are due to the operating
conditions and are therefore of no Picture no: 17875s.tif
significance - see pag e 149. C ont rolling exhaust em ission
S om e of the damaging substances in the
exhaust such as carbon monoxide (CO ),
hydrocarbons (HC) a nd nitrous oxides
(NO x) are red uced to a minimum by
ma king structural changes mainly in the
injection system a nd the ignition system in
conjunction with the catalytic converter.
 Driving an d Operation 147

Flashing with the engine running indicates

a fault which could lead to catalytic
conv erter damage. Y ou may c ontinue
driving without d amage if you bac k off
until the fla shing stop s and the control
indica tor illuminates stea dily. C ontac t a
work shop imm ediately.

Pict ure no: 17891s.t if Picture no: 17880s.tif

Control indicator Z for ex haust C ontrol indicator A for engine electronics
Illuminates when the ignition is switched on Illuminates for a few seconds after the
and during the start a ttempt. Goes off ignition is turned on.
shortly after the engine starts running. If it illuminates when the eng ine is running,
Illuminated with the eng ine running there is a fault in engine or transmission
indicates a fa ult in the ex haust gas electronics. The electronic sy stem switches
cleaning system . The permitted em issions to an emergency running p rogram me. Fuel
may be ex ceeded . Contact a workshop consum ption m ay be increa sed and the
immediately . driveability of the vehicle m ay be impaired.
In some cases, faults can be elim inated by
switching off the engine and restarting. If
the control indicator illuminates again
when the engine is running, contact a
workshop to elim inate the c ause of the
fault.
148 Drivin g and Operation
If it illuminates briefly , but does not recur,
it is of no significance.
Illumination of control indicator A can
indicate water in the diesel fuel filter 3 .
Check diesel fuel filter for p ossible w ater
residue, see page 230.
If it flashes after the ignition is switched on,
there is a fault in the imm obiliser sy stem.
The engine ca nnot be started
see page 27.
Exhaust gases Under c ertain driving cond itions, e.g . short
journeys, the sy stem may not clea n itself
9 Warning automatically.
If control indicator ! fla shes, drive on and
Engine ex ha ust gases contain poisonous
as soon as road and traffic conditions
carbon m onox id e, which is colourless and
allow, increase the speed to over 25 mp h
odourless and could be fatal if inha led. (40 km/h) to start the diesel p article filter
If exhaust gases penetrate the vehicle cleaning. Cleaning is quic kest at high
interior, open a window a nd contac t a speeds and under load . The engine speed
workshop . should not fall below 2000 rpm. The control
indicator goes out as soon as cleaning is
During the first drive, smoke may develop complete.
because of wax and oil evaporating on the We recommend not switching off the
exhaust sy stem. Park the v ehicle in the ignition during cleaning.
op en for a while after the first drive and
avoid inhaling the fumes.
Di esel pa rticle filt er 3
The diesel particle filter sy stem filters
ha rm ful soot particles out of the exhaust
gases.
The system c ontains a self-cleaning
function at set interv als. The filter is
cleaned by burning the soot pa rticles at
high temperature. This process is
autom atic in certain driv ing conditions and
can take up to 25 m inutes. During this time,
fuel consumption may be increa sed. Som e
od our a nd sm ok e are normal.

Mai nt ena nc e
Hav e all maintenance work carried out at
the interv als specified. We recommend
that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who has proper
equipm ent and trained personnel
ava ilab le. Electronic testing systems p ermit
rapid d ia gnosis and rem edy of fa ults. This
way you can be certain tha t all
components of the v ehicle s electrical,
injection and ignition sy stems operate
correctly , that your vehicle has a low level
of pollutant emission and that the c atalytic
converter system will hav e a long service
life.
You are thereby m aking an imp ortant
contrib ution towards keeping the air clean
and com plia nc e with emissions legislation.
Checking and a djustment of the fuel-
injection and ignition sy stems is part of the
scope of a Serv ice. For this reason you
should hav e all maintenance work carried
out at the intervals specified in your S ervice
Booklet.
Driving an d Operation 149
Drive Control Systems The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion;
Electronic Stab ility Program me ESP Pl us allows you to keep control of the
(ESP Pl us ) 3 vehicle a nd reminds you to m atch your
ESP P lu s im proves driving stability as speed to the road conditions.
necessary in any driving situation
regardless of the ty pe of road surface or 9 Warnin g
tyre g rip . It also prevents the d riv e wheels
Do not let this special safety feature
from spinning.
tempt you into ta king risk s w hen driving.
The system m onitors vehicle movements.
Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by
As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve
(understeers / ov ersteers) eng ine output is adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le.
reduced (the sound of the engine cha ng es)
and individual wheels are specifically
braked . This considerab ly improves the
driving stability of the vehicle on snow and
ice and on wet or slippery road surfa ces.
ESP P lu s is ready for operation as soon as
the ignition is switched on and control
indica tor v goes out.
When ESP P lu s comes into action, control
indica tor v flashes.
150 Drivin g and Operation

Control indicator v: Illuminates after interruption of power

Illuminates for a few seconds after the supply e.g. after disconnecting battery .
ignition is turned on. The system is ready
After a power supply interrup tion, the
for operation when the control indica tor steering angle sensor must be calibrated to
goes out.
ma ke the system operational:
Flashes w hile driving: z Automatic calibration driving in a
This shows tha t the system has com e into
straight line at a constant slow speed
action. The engine output may be reduced (12 to 25 m ph (20 to 40 km/h)) on a level,
(the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the
dry road.
vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a
small degree. z Manual calibration by turning steering
wheel from limit position to limit position.
If the control ind ic ator does not go off after
successful calibration, observ e notes in
Picture no: 17892s.tif midd le column.
Illum inates while driving:
Fault in the sy stem. Driving ca n be
continued. Poor road surface conditions
may however still cause vehicle stability to
be im paired.
Have the ca use of the fault eliminated.
Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem
allow s rap id fault identification.

Crui se control 3
Cruise control can store and maintain
speeds of approx. 20 to 125 m ph
(30 to 200 k m/h). Dev ia tion from the stored
speed is possible on uphill or d ownhill
inclines.
For safety reasons, the c ruise c ontrol
cannot be activated until the footb rake
has been applied once.
The c ruise c ontrol is operated with the
buttons I , R and O on the turn signal stalk.
Do not use cruise control if it is not
adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed
(e. g. in situations presenting a danger to
yourself and other road users, in heavy
traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy
roads).
Driving an d Operation 151
With Easy tronic 3, only use c ruise c ontrol
when in Autom atic mode.
When the cruise control is active, reaction
tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent
position of the feet.
9 Warning
Even with cruise c ontrol activated, the
driver has full resp onsibility for
maintaining an app ropriate speed.
Disregard of these instructions could lead
to injury or danger to life.
Picture no: 17893s.tif
C ontrol indicator m :
Illuminates for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on. The system is now
ready for operation.
When driving, control indicator m will
illuminate as soon as the system is switched
on.
152 Drivin g and Operation
Ac celera te:
With cruise control active, hold down
button I or tap it repeatedly: the speed is
increased c ontinuously or in steps of
1.2 m ph (2 km/h) without using the
accelerator ped al.
The current speed is stored and saved a fter
the I button has been released.
Decelerate:
With cruise control active, hold down
button R or briefly p ress it repea tedly:
speed is reduced continuously or in
steps of 1.2 m ph (2 k m/h).
The current speed is stored and saved a fter
Pictur e no: 7758u.tif
the R b utton has been released.
To activate:
Tap b utton I:
The c urrent speed is stored and
maintained. The ac celera tor p edal can be
released.
Vehicle speed can be increased by
depressing the accelerator pedal. When
the a ccelerator peda l is released, the
previously stored speed is resum ed.
To deactivate:
Tap button O :
C ruise control is switched off.
The vehicle slowly decelerates. To continue
driving, depress the accelerator pedal in
the usual way .
For reasons of safety , cruise control
deactivates under certain d riv ing
conditions.
For ex ample:
z if the vehicles speed drops below
approx. 20 mp h (30 km/h) or,
z if the footbrake is d epressed or,
z if the clutch pedal is dep ressed or,
z if Easytronic 3 selector lev er in N .
Resuming the stored speed:
Tap button R at a speed a bove 20 mph
(30 km/h): the speed selected before the
cruise control w as switched off is resumed.
The stored speed va lue is deleted when the
ignition is switched off.

Park ing dista nc e sensors 3
Parking distance sensors make rev erse
parking easier by measuring the distance
between the rear of the vehicle a nd an
obstacle throug h ultrasonic reflection, and
by warning you with an acoustic signal in
the p assenger compartment.
The system record s the distance using four
sensors in the rear bumper.
To activate:
The p arking dista nce sensors ac tiv ate
automatically when the ignition is sw itc hed
on and reverse gear is engaged .
O perational rea diness is indicated by a
brief tone.
If the vehicle slowly gets close to an
obstacle w hile rev ersing, an intermittent
acoustic signal is audible in the passenger
compartment when the vehicle tail is less
than one m etre from the obstacle. The
interval between the signals becomes
shorter as the distance is reduced. If the
distance is less than 30 c m, a continuous
signa l is aud ible.
To deactiv ate:
The system d eactiva tes autom atically
when rev erse g ear is disengaged.
Picture no: 14779s.tif
9 Warning
Under certain circumstances, v arious
reflective surfaces on objects or c lothing
as well as ex ternal noise sources may
cause the system to fail to d etec t
obstacles. For this reason, care must be
taken when rev ersing even if the parking
distance sensors are operational. This is
of particular importance when in the
vicinity of p edestrians.
Driving an d Operation 153
Towing equipment,
carav an / tra iler towing:
If a towing dev ice is sub sequently fitted to
the vehicle, the system must be set to the
modified vehic le leng th by a work shop.
When operating without a tra iler, the tow
bar must be removed , else the system can
be dam aged.
Fitting rear load ra cks 3:
Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted
nea r the sensors could disrupt the system .
Fault:
O n sy stem faults, a permanent tone
sounds at a dista nce of 1 metre from the
obstacle. Have the cause of the fault
elimina ted b y a work shop.
In order to avoid operationa l problems or
erroneous information, the sensors m ust be
undamag ed a nd free of soiling, snow and
ice.
154 Drivin g and Operation
Brake system
The effectiveness of the brakes is a n
important factor for traffic safety.
To improve effectiveness, do not b ra ke
unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles
(200 km) after new brake pads have been
fitted.
Brake pad wear must not exceed a
specified limit. Regular maintenance as
detailed in the Service Book let is therefore
of the utm ost importance for traffic safety.
Have worn brake pads replaced by a
work shop.
Tested a nd approved pads give optimum
braking performance.
Brake pads worn to the minimum level
cause grinding noises. You may continue
to drive but ha ve the pads replaced as
soon as possible. To change the pad s,
contact a workshop.
Picture no: 14722s.tif
Brak e assi st
If the footbrake is operated with a powerful
push, the v ehicle is a utomatica lly braked
at full brak ing power in order to achiev e
the shortest possible braking distance
when full-on braking occurs (braking
assistant).
Maintain steady pressure on the footbrake
for a s long as full-on braking is to continue.
When the footbrake is released, the
ma ximum brak e force amplification is
taken away .
Ad aptiv e brake li ghts 3
During full-on brak ing, all three brake
lights flash for the dura tion of ABS control.

Footbrak e
The footbrake comprises tw o independent
brake circuits.
If one brake circuit fa ults, the vehicle can
still be b ra ked with the other b ra ke c ircuit.
However the braking effect will occ ur a t a
lower pedal position and consid erably
more force is required. The braking
distance is longer. Contact a w ork shop
before continuing to drive.
To ensure that full pedal travel can be
utilized, espec ia lly in case of a fa ult in one
of the brak e circuits, there must b e no mats
in the vicinity of the pedals see page 139.
When the engine is not running, the
assistance of the brake servo unit
disappears once the footbrake has been
depressed once or twice. Braking effect is
not reduced, b ut b ra king requires
significantly greater force. This is especially
important to bear in mind when towing.
Check the brake lights b efore starting out
on a journey.
Driving an d Operation 155
Shortly after starting ea ch journey , the
effectiveness of the brake system should
be tested at low sp eed s a nd without
inconveniencing other traffic, especially if
the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle
ha s b een washed.
The brake fluid lev el should be checked
regularly. If the brak e fluid level is too low
and the handbrak e is not applied, control
indica tor R illuminates in the instrument
cluster see page 87.
Hill St art Assist 3 (HS A)
The system helps pull away on inclines.
After releasing the footb ra ke, if the
ha ndb ra ke is not app lied, the brakes are Picture no: 14723s.tif
only released after 2 second s. As soon as Hand brak e
the acceleration is sufficient to prevent Alway s apply handbrak e firm ly. O n slopes,
rolling ba ck, the brake is released. app ly the handbrake as firm ly as possible.
The mechanical handbrak e a cts on the
brak es on the rear wheels. It eng ages
automatically when app lied.
To release the ha nd brake, p ull the lever up
slightly , press the ratchet knob, and fully
lower the lever.
To reduc e the operating forces of the
handbrake, ap ply the footbrak e at the
same time.
156 Drivin g and Operation

For vehicles with Ea sy tronic 3 , the c ontrol Anti-lock Brake System (ABS )
indica tor flashes for a few seconds when ABS continuously monitors the v ehicle s
the ignition is turned off, if the handbrake brak e system and prev ents the wheels from
is not app lied. locking regardless of the road condition
and ty re grip.
9 Warning
It starts to regulate the braking pressure as
If the control indicator illuminates when soon a s a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
the handb ra ke is released, stop driving The vehicle rema ins steerable, even in the
immediately. C ontac t a workshop . event of v ery heavy braking, for insta nce
on bends or when swerving to a void an
obstacle. Ev en in the c ase of full-on
brak ing, the ABS mak es it possible to drive
round an obstacle w ithout releasing the
brak es.
Pict ure no: 17894s.t if ABS control is mad e ap parent throug h a
Brak e system control i ndicat or R pulse in the footbrake and the noise of the
The c ontrol indicator illumina tes after the regula tion process.
ignition is turned on, when the ha ndb ra ke
is app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid lev el 9 Warnin g
is too low . Brake fluid see pa ge 232.
For op tim um brak ing, keep the footbrak e
9 Warning fully depressed throughout the b ra king
process, despite the fact that the pedal is
If the control ind icator illum inates when pulsating. Do not reduce the pressure on
the handbrake is released, stop driving the pedal.
im med ia tely. Contact a w ork shop.
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into tak ing risks when driv ing.
Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by
adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le.
 Driving an d Operation 157

Self-check Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a

Each time the ignition is turned on and the workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated
engine is started, after driv ing at a speed into the system allows rapid fault
of approx. 2 m ph (3 k m/h), the system identification.
performs a self-check which may be
audible.
Fault

9 Warning
If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may
be subject to loc king due to braking that
is heav ier than norm al. The advantages
of ABS are no longer op erational.
Pict ure no: 17895s.t if
Cont rol indica tor u for ABS You can continue driving, prov ided you
The c ontrol indicator illumina tes for a few drive with care a nd antic ipation.
seconds after the ignition is turned on. The
system is ready for operation when the
control indica tor goes out.
If the control indicator does not g o out
after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while
driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The
brake system remains operational without
ABS regulation.
158 Drivin g and Operation
Wheels, tyres
See page 216 for suitable tyres a nd
restrictions.
Tyres fitted in the factory are a dapted to
the c hassis a nd provide optimum driving
comfort and safety .
Cha ng ing tyre / w heel t ype
Before changing to other tyres or wheels,
note the necessary c hanges.
If tyres of a different size than those fitted
at the factory are used, the electronic
speedometer may require reprogramm ing
to ensure that the correct speed is
displayed.
9 Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may
lead to a ccidents and rend er the vehicle
unroadworthy.
Fit ting new tyres
Fit ty res in pairs or in sets, which is even
better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are:
z the sam e size,
z the sam e desig n,
z the sam e ma ke,
z and hav e the sam e tread pa ttern.
Fit directional tyres such tha t they roll in the
direction of travel. The rolling direc tion is
indica ted b y a sym bol (e.g . an arrow) on
the sidewall.
Ty res fitted op posing the rolling direction
(such as when changing a tyre) should be
refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
way to b enefit fully from the design
prop erties of the ty re.
When disposing of tyres, follow the lega l
requirements.
C ertain brands of tyre have a bea ded ed ge
to protec t alloy wheels from dama ge. If
wheel trims are used on steel wheels w ith
beaded-edge tyres, the following
procedure must be followed:
z Use wheel trims and ty res tha t are
approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in
question a nd therefore meet all the
requirem ents pertaining to the
respective wheel / tyre combination.
z If the wheel trims and tyres used a re not
Vauxhall-app rov ed, the tyres must not
ha ve a beaded edg e.
9 Warnin g
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims
could lead to sudden loss of air and
thereby accidents.
 Driving an d Operation 159

Tyre pr essure
Check ty re pressure, including the spa re
wheel, at least ev ery 14 day s and prior to
any long journey; the ty res should be
check ed when cold. Dont forget to check
the spare 3.

Picture no: 14194s.tif Pict ure no: 9358t.tif

Use the valv e cap key to m ake unscrewing
the valve ca ps easier. The k ey is located on
the inside of the ta nk flap.
Ty re p ressure, see page 216.
Do not reduce ty re pressure when the tyres
are wa rm. O therwise the pressure may
drop b elow the perm issible minimum when
the tyres cool down.
After having chec ked the tyre pressures,
tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap
key .
Incorrect inflation pressures will impair
safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel
econom y and w ill increase tyre wear.
If the pressure is too low , this can result in
consid erable tyre heating and internal
dam age, lead ing to tread separation and
even ty re blow-out at high speeds.
Hidd en tyre dama ge is not elim inated by
adjusting the inflation p ressure.
9 Warnin g
Incorrect ty re pressure could lead to a flat
tyre.
160 Drivin g and Operation

Check tyres regularly for dama ge

(p enetrated foreign bodies, punctures,
cuts, c ra cks, bulges in side walls). Chec k
wheels for dam age. If dam age or unusual
wear is found, contact a work shop.

9 Warning
Dama ge m ay lead to ty re blow-out.

Pict ure no: 15941s.t if Pict ure no: 6456u.tif

Tyre cond ition, w heel condi tion Tread d ep th
Drive over edges slowly and at a rig ht C heck tread depth regularly.
angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges If w ear is greater in the front than in the
can lead to hidden ty re damage a nd wheel rear, switch the front and rea r tyres.
dam age which is only noticed later on.
C orrect the ty re pressures.
When pa rk ing, ensure that the tyres a re not
pressed against the ed ge of the kerb . For reasons of safety , tyres should be
replaced when their tread depth has worn
down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).
 Driving an d Operation 161

General i nformati on Tyre d esigna tions

Meaning s:
z The risk of aq ua planing is greater if the
tyres are worn. e.g. 175/70 R 14 88 T
z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very 175 = Ty re w idth in mm
little or not at all. A spare wheel which 70 = Cross-section ratio (tyre depth to
has not b een used for six years should be width in %)
used w ith ca re. R = Belt typ e R a dial
z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history 14 = Wheel diam eter in inc h
and use of w hich y ou do not know. 88 = Load index
z So as not to im pair brake cooling , use e.g. 88 c orresponds to 567 k g
only wheel trims app rov ed for use on T = Speed c od e letter
your vehicle. S peed code letters:
Q up to 100 mp h (160 km/h)
Pictur e no: 6457u.tif
The legally permissible minimum tread S up to 112 mp h (180 km/h)
depth (1.6 m m) has been reached when T up to 118 mp h (190 km/h)
the tread has worn down as far as one of H up to 130 mp h (210 km/h)
the tread wear indicators (TWI1 )). A V up to 150 mp h (240 km/h)
number of tread wear indicators are W up to 168 mp h (270 km/h)
spaced at equal intervals around the ty re
within the tread. Their p osition is indicated
by markings on the tyre sidewa ll.

1)
TWI = T read Wea r I ndicator.
162 Drivin g and Operation
Winter tyres 3
For notes on fitting new tyres see
page 158.
See page 216 for restric tions.
Winter tyres (M + S tyres) improve safety at
tem peratures below 7 C and should
therefore be fitted on all the wheels.
The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they
have limited qualities for winter driving.
If the maxim um perm issible speed for the
winter ty res is less than that of the vehicle,
a notice ind icating the ma ximum
permissible speed for the tyres must be
affixed within the drivers field of v ision 1).
If y ou use the spare wheel when it is fitted
with a summer tyre, the v ehicle s
driveability may be affected, espec ia lly on
slip pery roa d surfaces. Ob ta in a
rep la cement for the faulty ty re as soon a s
possible, and hav e the wheel balanced
and fitted to the v ehicle.
Wheel c overs 3
If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Vauxhall-approved , mak e sure that the
tyres d o not hav e a bea ded edge see
page 158.
1)
Va ries fro m country to country o n account of
nationa l regula tions .
Picture no: 6459u.tif
Tyre chains 3
Limitations and further information
see p age 216.
Ty re chains are only permitted on the drive
wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to
the tyres sym metrically in order to achiev e
a concentric fit.
Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no
more than 10 m m to the ty re tread and the
inboard sides (including chain lock).
Wheel trims on steel wheels could come
into contac t w ith parts of the c hain and be
dam aged . Remove the wheel trim
see page 178.
Tyre cha ins may only be used at sp eeds up
to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when trav elling
on roads that are free of snow , they m ay be
used for brief periods only since they are
subject to rap id wea r on a hard road a nd
ma y sna p.
Temporary spare wheel 3:
Tyre chains must not be used on the
temporary spare wheel. If y ou need to use
tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
fit the temporary spa re on the rear ax le
and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the
front axle.
For notes on the tem porary spare wheel
see pages 178, 216.
C ha nging wheels see page 178.
 Driving an d Operation 163

Roo f racks 3 Towing equipment 3

9 Warning
Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers must b e informed
according ly .
9 Warning
Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers must be informed
accordingly.

For safety reasons and to avoid roof
dam age, we recommend using the
Vauxhall roof ra ck system approved for
your vehicle.
Disengage covers concealing roof ra ck
mounts b y pushing sliders in d irection of
arrow (e.g. w ith coin) and rem ove. To close
roof rack mounts, insert c ov ers at front and
enga ge sliders at rear.
Fasten the roof rack following the
instructions that ac company the sy stem.
Driving hints see page 138.
Only use a trailer towing d evice approved
for the vehicle. Ha ve a towing dev ice fitted
by workshop, who will inform y ou of any
possible trailer load increa ses. They will
ha ve the instructions for fitting the device
and any necessa ry changes to the vehicle
concerning cooling, heat shields or other
devic es.
9 Warning
The coupling b all bar is to be rem ov ed
when not towing.
Mounting dimensions of tow ing
equipment 3 see p age 222.
Picture no: 14195s.tif
Towing equipment with
removable c oupling ball bar 3
St owage of coup ling ba ll bar
The coupling b all bar is located in a bag
with the vehicle tools housed under the
spare wheel - see illustration above.
S pare w heel 3 - see page 177.
O n vehicles with a tyre repair kit 3, the
coupling ball b ar is loc ated in the left
stowage compartment beneath the floor
cover in the lugga ge com partment - see
pag e 166, Fig. 17923 S .
164 Drivin g and Operation
Pict ure no: 15271s.t if
Fitting the c oupling b all ba r
Fold down the socket. Remove the sealing
plug from the hole for the coupling ball bar
and stow it in the lugg age compartment.
Pict ure no: 12416t.tif
Check ing the tensioning of the coupling
ball bar:
z Red mark ing on turn knob p oints
towards white marking on coupling ball
bar.
z Gap of a pprox. 4 mm between turn k nob
and c oupling ba ll bar.
z K ey is in lock at position 1.
Picture no: 12417t.tif
O therwise, the coupling ball bar must b e
tensioned b efore it is inserted into the
coupling housing:
z Unlock coupling ball bar (k ey to
position 1) see Fig. 12416 T.
z Pull turn knob out and turn it forwards as
far as it will go see illustration a bove.

Pi cture no: 12418t.tif
Inserting the coupling ba ll bar:
Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into
the c oupling housing a nd push firmly
upwards until the coupling ball b ar
enga ges in position.
The turn knob snaps back into its home
position resting ag ainst the coupling b all
bar.
9 Warning
Do not touch the turn knob w hen
inserting the coup ling ball bar - risk of
injury.
Driving an d Operation 165
I mporta nt
C heck tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly
insta lled:
z Green marking on turn knob points
tow ards white mark ing on coupling b all
bar.
z No gap between turn knob and c oupling
ball bar.
z Coupling ball ba r must b e sea ted firmly
in coup ling housing.
z Coupling ball ba r must b e locked and
key must be removed.
Picture no: 16484s.tif 9 Warnin g
Lock coup ling ball bar (key to p osition 2
see p age 164, Fig. 12416 T). Rem ov e k ey Tow ing is permitted only with a correctly
and press protective flap into position. fitted towbar. If the towba r cannot be
fitted correctly , contact a work shop.
When the coupling ball ba r is lock ed, the
turn knob c an no longer be pulled out.
Eye for break -awa y stopp ing cab le
For trailers w ith brakes, attach break -a way
stopping cable to rear tow ing eye
see arrow in Fig. 16484 S.
166 Drivin g and Operation
Pi cture no: 13670t.tif
Dismounting the coupling b all ba r
Unloc k coupling ball bar (key to position 1
see page 164, Fig. 12416 T).
Pull turn k nob out a nd turn it forwards as
far as it will go. Rem ov e c oupling ba ll bar
downwards out of coupling housing .
Fold away the socket see page 164,
Fig. 15271 S.
Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the
coupling ball ba r.
Do not use steam-jet clea ners or other
high-pressure cleaners to c lean the
coupling ball ba r.
Picture no: 17923s.tif
Stowa ge of coupling b all b ar
Plac e coup ling ball bar in bag, as show n on
page 163 in Fig . 14195 S, and attach next
to vehicle tools, benea th the spare w heel.
On vehicles with a ty re repair kit 3 , the
coupling b all bar is stored in the left
stowage compa rtm ent beneath the floor
cover in the luggage compartment - see
illustration a bove.
Caravan / trailer towing
C arava n and tra iler loads 1 )
The permissib le carav an / tra iler loads are
vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent
ma ximum v alues which must not be
exceeded. The actua l carav an / trailer load
is the d ifference between the actual gross
weight of the carav an / tra iler and the
actual c oupling socket load with the
carav an / tra iler coupled.
When the caravan / trailer load is being
checked , therefore, only the caravan /
trailer wheels and not the jockey wheel
must be sta nding on the weig hing
app aratus.
The permissib le carav an / tra iler loads for
y our v ehicle are specified in the vehicle
documents. Unless otherwise specified,
they are valid for gradients up to
ma x. 12%.
1)
Ob serve n atio nal regula tions.

The p ermissible carav an / trailer load
should b e fully utilised only b y drivers who
are adequa tely experienced in towing
large or heavy carav ans / trailers.
The p ermitted caravan / trailer loa d
applies up to the specified incline and up to
an altitude of 1000 metres above sea-level.
Since engine power decreases as altitude
increases because of the air becom ing
thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability,
the p ermitted towing weig ht a lso
decreases by 10% for every 1000 m etres of
additional altitude. The towing weight
does not have to be reduced when driv ing
on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%,
e.g. m otorway s).
The a ctual caravan / trailer load plus the
actual gross weight of the tow ing vehicle
must not exc eed the m aximum p ermitted
towing weight. For exam ple, if the
permitted Gross Vehic le Weight is utilised,
the caravan / trailer load must only be used
until the max imum permitted towing
weight is reached. The m aximum
permitted towing w eight is shown on the
identification plate see page 206.
Coupling soc ket load
The coupling sock et load is the load
exerted by the caravan / trailer on the
coupling ball. It can be varied by cha nging
the weight distribution when loading the
caravan / trailer.
The max im um perm issible coupling sock et
loa d (55 kg ) of the towing vehicle is
specified on the towing equipm ent
identification plate and in the vehicle
docum ents. This m ust alway s b e comp lied
with, particularly in the case of heav y
caravans / tra ilers. The coupling socket
loa d should be no less than 25 k g.
When m easuring the coupling sock et load,
make sure that the draw bar of the loaded
caravan / trailer is at the same height as it
will be when the c aravan / trailer is coupled
with the towing v ehicle loaded. Particularly
important for c aravans / trailers w ith
tand em axle.
Driving an d Operation 167
Rear a xle load during t owing
With the carav an / tra iler connected and
the tow ing vehicle fully loaded , including
all occupants, the permitted rear axle load
(specified on identification plate and
vehicle d oc um ents) m ay be exceeded by
no more than 25 kg , and the maxim um
permitted Gross Vehicle Weight by no more
than 30 kg.
If the ma ximum permitted rear a xle load is
exceeded, a maxim um sp eed of 60 m ph
(100 km /h) applies, and 50 mph (80 k m/h)
for commercial vehicles. S lower nationa l
ma ximum speed limits for towed vehicles
must be complied with.
168 Drivin g and Operation
Pictur e no: 9358t.tif
Tyre pr essure
O n the towing vehicle, increase the tyre
pressure to the value g iven for full load
see page 216. Also check ty re pressures of
the trailer wheels and the spare wheel 3.
Pict ure no: 12421t.tif
Dr iving charact eristi cs, towing tips
In the case of caravans / trailers with
brakes, atta ch the break-away stopp ing
cable to the eye (arrow in illustration).
Before a tta ching the carava n / trailer,
lubricate the ball of the ca ra van / trailer
tow ing devic e. H ow ever, do not lubricate
the ball if a stab iliser, which acts on the
coupling b all, is being used to damp
snaking.
Check caravan / trailer lighting b efore
starting to drive. The fog tail light on the
vehicle is deactiv ated w hen towing a
caravan or trailer.
Carava n / trailers with LED turn signals
must hav e a provision that mak es it
possible to monitor standard light bulbs.
Turn signa l control indicator - see page 86.
Handling is greatly influenced by the
loading of the caravan / trailer. Load s
should therefore b e sec ured so that they
cannot slip , and should be placed in the
centre of the c aravan / trailer if possib le,
i.e. ab ov e the axle.
In the case of ca ra vans / trailers with low
driving stability, do not ex ceed a speed of
50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a friction-typ e
stabiliser is strongly recommended.
Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 km/h)
if possible, even in countries where higher
speeds are permitted.
Mak e sure that y ou ha ve enoug h room
when cornering and avoid sudden
ma noeuv res.
If the caravan / trailer starts to sway , drive
more slowly , do not attem pt to correct the
steering and brake sha rp ly if necessary .
If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully ,
depress the footbrak e as hard as possible.
Remem ber that the braking d istance for
vehicles towing carava ns / trailers w ith and
without brakes is always greater than that
for vehic les not tow ing a carav an / trailer.

When driving downhill, the brakes a re
under considerab ly m ore load when towing
a cara van / trailer. For this reason, drive in
the same gear as if driv ing uphill and drive
at a similar speed.
In Automatic mode, the Easytronic 3
automatically selec ts the drive programme
with optimum engine brak ing effect.
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
cooling power is therefore independent of
the engine speed.
Since a considerable amount of heat is
generated at high engine sp eed s a nd less
at slower speeds, d o not shift down when
climbing hills while the vehicle is still coping
with the g ra dient in the higher gea r.
Diesel engines: O n gradients of 10% or
more, do not drive faster than 20 mph
(30 km /h) in first gear or 30 m ph (50 km/h)
in second gear.
Driving an d Operation 169
Before starting-off under extreme
conditions (high combination weight,
mountainous terrain w ith steep inclines),
switch off all unnecessary electrical loads
(e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning
system 3, heated front seats 3 ).
Picture no: 14196s.tif
Start ing on inclines
For vehicles with manual transm ission, the
most fav ourable eng ine speed when
starting-off on an incline is between 2500
and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and
between 2000 and 2500 rpm for diesel
engines. Hold engine speed constant,
engage clutch gradually (let slip), release
ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible,
the engine speed should not drop d uring
this procedure.
For vehicles with Easy tronic 3 in Automa tic
mode, sim ply app ly full gas.
170 Self-help, Vehicle Care

Self-help, 9 Warning
Vehicle Care Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle
Diesel fuel system, bleeding . .... .... ..... . 170 passengers must be informed
Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 170 accordingly.
Starting .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 171
Starting the engine with jum p leads 3 172 Diesel fuel system , bleeding
Towing the v ehicle... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 173 Nev er let the tank run dry !
Towing another vehicle.... ..... .... .... ..... . 175
If control indicator Y illuminates, refuel as
Warning triangle 3 ,
soon as possible. Refuel immediately if it
First-aid kit + 3 . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 176
flashes.
Jac k and vehicle tools 3 .. .... .... ..... . 176
Spa re wheel 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 177 Restarting after running out of fuel is
possible, but sta rting b ehaviour will be Picture no: 16109s.tif
Changing wheels . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 178
delay ed. Turn on the ignition three times Bon net
Tyre repair kit 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 182
for 15 seconds eac h tim e. Then start the To open the bonnet, pull the release lever
Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 186 engine for a maximum of 40 seconds 1). located on the driv ers side b elow the
Fuses and the most important c ircuits If it does not start, repeat the p rocess after instrument panel. The bonnet will then be
they p rotect .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 188 waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still unlocked and will partially open. R eturn
Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 190 does not start, contac t a workshop . release lever to its original position.
Halogen headlight system .... .... .... ..... . 191
Halogen headlight system 3,
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 193
Xenon headlight system .. ..... .... .... ..... . 193
Parking lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 195
Front turn sig nal lights . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 196
Front fog lights 3 . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 196
Tail lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 197
Numb er plate light .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 198
Courtesy lig hts ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 200
Vehicle care. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 202

1)
With en gine Z 17 DT H:
For techn ical reaso ns, only po ssible fo r
30 secon ds. Sales desig nation - see pa ge 209 .

Pict ure no: 17883s.t if
A release lever is loca ted behind the
radiator grille just right of centre a s
viewed from the front.
To open, pull lever and raise bonnet.
Any dirt or snow on the b onnet can slide
down towards the wind screen when the
bonnet is opened a nd block the air intak e
see page 131.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 171
Starting
Do not sta rt wit h quick charger
This prevents d amage to electronic
components.
Do not sta rt by pushing or tow ing
Because your vehicle is fitted with a
cataly tic converter, it must not be started
by pushing or towing see page 145.
The v ehicle can only be started using jum p
leads see follow ing page.
Picture no: 14733s.tif
To hold the bonnet in the open position,
insert the supp ort rod loc ated a t right
angles above the rad iator grille into the
sma ll slot in the underside of the bonnet.
Before c losing bonnet, press support rod
firmly into its retainer. Lower the bonnet
gradually and then allow it to fall into the
lock under its own weight.
Check tha t the bonnet is lock ed in position
by pulling at its front edge. I f it is not
engaged, repea t the procedure.
172 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Starting the en gine with jump
leads 3
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be
started using jump lead s and the battery of
another vehicle.
Attemp ts to start the vehicle should be
mad e at intervals of one minute a nd
should not last longer than 15 seconds.
9 Warning
Be extrem ely careful when starting with
jump leads. Any dev iation from the
following instructions can lead to injuries
or damage caused by battery explosion
or damage to the elec trical sy stems of
both v ehicles.
Picture no: 15286a.tif
z Never ex pose the b attery to nak ed
flames or spark s.
z A discharged battery can freeze at a
temperature of approx. 0 C. Alwa ys
thaw a frozen battery in a wa rm room
before connecting jump leads.
z Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, fa bric s or
painted surfaces. The fluid contains
sulp huric ac id which can cause injuries
and d amage in the event of d irect
contact.
z Wear eye protec tion and protective
clothing when handling a b attery.
z Use auxiliary battery with sam e v olta ge
(12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) m ust not be
considera bly less than that of the
discharged ba ttery. Voltage and
capacity information can be found on
the batteries.
z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
and a cross section of at least 16 mm2
(25 mm 2 for diesel engines).
z Do not disconnect the discharged
battery from the vehicle.
z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers.
z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump
starting.
z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
touch those of the other lead .
z Do not touch the vehicles while jump
starting.
z Apply handbrak e. M anual tra nsmission
in neutral (Easytronic 3 in position N).

Pict ure no: 16485s.t if
Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the
illustration:
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to
the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery
prov iding the jump start (identified by
"+" sign on battery case or terminal).
2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the
positive terminal 2 of the discharged
battery (" +" sign).
3. Connect the first end of the other jump
lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the
battery prov iding the start ("" sign).
4. Connect the other end of the second
jump lead 4 to ground on the other
vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw
connection in the engine suspension.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 173
z Do not connect leads to negative
term inal of discharged battery!
z The connection p oint should be as far
away from the discharged battery as
possible.
z Route the lead s so that they cannot
catch on rotating parts in the engine
compa rtm ent.
z Start the engine of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
Start attempts should b e m ade at
intervals of 1 m inute and should not la st
longer than 15 seconds. Picture no: 17896s.tif
z After starting, allow both engines to idle Towing the vehicle
for approx. 3 minutes with the leads To open the cap of the front rig ht towing
connected. eye, disengage the bottom of the cap and
z In order to avoid excess v oltage in the pull downwards to remove.
electrical system, before remov ing a
lead, switch on an electrical consum er
(e. g. light, heated rear window) in the
vehicle receiving the jump start.
z Reverse above sequence ex actly when
rem oving lead s.
174 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Pict ure no: 14198s.t if
The towing eye is located in the vehicle tool
bag 3 in the lugg age com partment
beneath the spare wheel 3 - see illustra tion
above - or, for m odel v ariants with a tyre
rep air kit 3, in a stow age compartment
beneath the floor cover - see page 177,
Fig. 17918 S.
Spa re wheel 3 see pag e 177.
Tyre repair kit 3 see page 182.
Jac k and v ehicle tools 3 see page 176.
9 Warnin g
For brak ing and steering, significantly
hig her forces are required:
Brake assistance and steering assistance
are effective only with the engine
running.
To prevent the entry of exhaust fum es from
the tow ing vehicle, switch on the air
recirc ulation 3 and close the wind ow s.
C ontact a workshop who will provide a
relia ble, fa st and professional repa ir.
Picture no: 17897s.tif
Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far
as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
position.
Attac h a tow rope 3 or better still a
tow rod 3 to the eye.
The towing eye must only be used for
tow ing and not recovering a vehicle.
Switch on ignition to release steering
colum n lock and to permit opera tion of
brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.
Manua l transmission in neutral,
Easytronic 3 in position N.
Driv e slowly. Do not driv e jerkily. Excessive
tra ctiv e force can dam age the vehicle.
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 175

If the autom atic clutch is relea sed

manually a fter a p ower failure on vehicles
with Ea sytronic 3 , towing is not permitted,
see page 137. I n this case, contact a
workshop immediately.
After towing, unscrew towing eye by
rotating cloc kwise and insert a nd c lose the
cap.
Towing serv ice
Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
service of your choice and obtain an
estimate on tow ing costs before employing
any towing serv ice. In this w ay y ou a void
unnecessary costs and possible insurance
problem s during c la im processing . Picture no: 14199s.tif Picture no: 17898s.tif
Towing another veh icle O n some model variants, the towing ey e is
Attac h a tow rope 3 or better still a located behind a cover 3.
tow rod 3 to the rear towing eye on the S la cken the sc rew a quarter turn with a
rig ht side of the v ehicle underbody, but screwd riv er 3 (see illustration) and remove
never to the rear axle. the cover.
Driv e slowly. Do not driv e jerkily. Excessive The tow ing eye must only be used for
tra ctiv e force can dam age the vehicle. towing and not recovering a vehicle.
Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive
tractive force c an damage the vehicle.
After towing, fit cover a nd secure with
screw.
176 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Pict ure no: 16140s.t if
Warning triangle 3,
first-aid kit + 3
The w arning triangle and first-aid kit
(cushion) a re strap ped with a rubber b and
in the stowage compartment on the
left-hand side of the luggage
compartment, beneath the floor covering.
Picture no: 14201s.tif
To op en, remove the luggage
compartment cov er 3 see pag e 54, lift
the floor using the ha ndle and raise
tow ards the front.
Picture no: 14203s.tif
Jack and veh icle to ols 3
The ja ck and the vehicle tools hav e b een
spec ia lly developed for your vehicle and
must only be used on that vehicle. Only use
jack for cha nging wheels.
The ja ck and v ehicle tools are stowed in a
bag und erneath the spa re wheel 3 in the
luggage compa rtm ent.

Pict ure no: 17918s.t if
For vehicles w ith a tyre repair k it 3, the
tools a re stowed tog ether with the tyre
rep air kit in the stowage compartment
beneath the floor cover in the luggag e
compartment.
Spare wheel 3
Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre
rep air kit instead of a spare wheel.
See page 182.
Picture no: 16141s.tif
The spare wheel is in a rec ess in the floor of
the vehicle and is screw ed d ow n with a
wing nut.
To access the spare wheel, remove the
lugg age compartment c ov er 3 see
page 54, lift the floor c ov er using the
ha ndle and raise tow ards the front. Fold
the spare wheel cov er up towards the front.
Stowi ng standard size tyres i n the spa re
wheel w ell
The spa re wheel well is not designed for all
sizes of commercia lly availab le ty res. If a
larger wheel m ust be stow ed in the sp are
wheel well after changing wheels, place the
floor cover on the ov erlaying wheel.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 177
General inform ation
Depending on the model variant, the sp are
wheel m ay be in the form of a tem pora ry
spare wheel 3. R efer to the notes on this
pag e and pages 162, 216.
O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3, the sp are
wheel m ay have a steel rim.
If y ou use winter tyres 3, the sp are wheel
ma y still be fitted with a summer tyre. If y ou
use the spare wheel, the v ehicle s handling
ma y be altered. O btain a replacement for
the fa ulty tyre as soon as possible, and
have the w heel balanced and fitted to the
vehicle.
The spare wheel ma y have a smaller tyre
and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted
on the vehicle1 ): Using the spare wheel may
alter the driving behaviour of the v ehicle.
Hav e the defective tyre replaced as soon
as possible, balance the wheel and have it
mounted on the vehic le.
1)
Co untry-specific version:
In som e cou ntries, th e spa re w heel m ay on ly
be us ed a s a temp ora ry s pa re wh eel.
178 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Notes on tempor ary spa re wheel 3
z If the temporary spare wheel is used, the
handling of the vehicle may change,
particularly if winter tyres 3 are being
used .
z The Electronic Stability Program
ESP Pl us 3 may sw itc h itself off.
z Replace defective tyres a s soon as
possible, balance wheel and fit to
vehicle.
z Fit only one temp orary sp are wheel.
z Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
z Ta ke c urv es slowly .
z Do not use the tem porary spare wheel
for a lengthy period.
z Replace tem pora ry spare wheel with full
specification w heel without delay.
z Ty re chains 3 are not perm itted on the
temporary spare wheel. I f tyre cha ins
hav e to b e used after a front wheel
puncture, fit temp orary spare w heel to
the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the
front axle. C heck tyre pressure and
correct if necessary, see page 216.
z Note the information on the temporary
spare wheel on pages 162, 216.
Notes on directional tyres 3
Directiona l tyres only a chieve their full
performance potential when m ounted in
the presc rib ed direction of rotation. If, after
a flat tyre, the ty re or spare wheel is
mounted against the p resc rib ed d irection
of rotation, observ e the following:
z Driving conditions m ay be altered.
Replace the defective tyre as soon as
possible, balance the wheel and mount it
on the v ehicle.
z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph
(80 k m/h).
z Drive esp ecially carefully in wet or snowy
weather.
For further inform ation on directional
tyres see p age 158.
Changing wh eels
There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a
spare wheel see page 182.
To ensure y our safety, m ake the following
preparations and ob serve the follow ing
inform ation when changing wheels:
z Park the vehic le on a lev el, firm and non-
skid surface.
z Switch on the haz ard warning lights,
apply the handbrake, eng age first gear
or reverse gear (Easytronic 3 in
position N or R).
z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle.
Wa rning triangle see page 176.
z Remov e spare wheel from luggage
compartment, see previous page.
z Before ra ising the vehicle, set the front
wheels to the straight-ahead position.
z Never change more tha n one wheel
at a time.
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 179

z Block the wheel d iagona lly opposite the

wheel to b e changed, by placing wedge
bloc ks or equivalent in front and behind
the wheel.
z Use the jack 3 only to cha ng e wheels.
z If the ground on which the v ehicle is
standing is soft, a solid b oa rd (max . 1 cm
thick) should be placed under the jack 3.
Using a thic ker board could damage the
ja ck and the vehicle.
z No peop le or animals ma y be in the
vehicle when it is jacked up.
z Nev er crawl under a jack ed-up v ehicle.
z Do not start or run the engine while the Picture no: 14204s.tif Picture no: 11721s.tif
vehicle is on the jack. 1. Remove the wheel trim using the hook 3 Alloy wheels 3:
found with the vehicle tools. Vehicle Prise off the hub cap b y inserting a
z Before inserting the wheel bolts when tools - see page 176. screwdriver 3 in the rec ess at the side of
cha nging wheels, lightly grease the cone the hub cap. Protect the rim by placing a
of each bolt. For this reason, carry some If the wheel trim has visible wheel
soft cloth between the screwdriv er and
conv entional grease. bolts 3, the trim can remain on the
the alloy wheel.
wheel. The retaining washers 3 on the
wheel bolts must not b e removed. Remov e wheel b olt caps 3 from wheel
bolts.

6
180 Self-help, Vehicle Care

Pict ure no: 11642s.t if Picture no: 11643s.tif Picture no: 14724s.tif
Alloy wheels w ith a nti-theft lock 3: 2. Slac ken wheel b olts using wheel bolt 3. The jacking p oints on the v ehicle
Unscrew hub cap using key included in wrench 3, putting on the w heel bolt underbody are ma rked by depressions
vehicle tools 3 and rem ov e it. wrench 3 as far as possible. on the lower body sill.

Pict ure no: 14762s.t if
4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the
necessary heig ht b y rotating the eye by
hand. Position the jack arm at the front
or rear so that the ja ck claw (see arrow in
illustration) spans the vertical base and
grip s in the recess in the vertical base.
Make sure it is properly positioned.
With VXR 3 and VXR Line 3, the jack 3
must not be used, since the vehicle m ay
be d amaged. C onsult a workshop.
Picture no: 14763s.tif
The ed ge of the jack base must be on the
ground directly below the jacking point,
in a m anner that prevents it from
slipping.
Raise vehicle by turning crank handle.
If this is not the case, carefully lower the
vehicle imm ediately and reposition the
jack.
5. Unscrew wheel b olts and wipe clean with
a c loth. Then apply a light coating of
grease to the wheel bolts. Do not g rease
the thread of the bolts. Do not put the
wheel bolts down in a location where
they may bec om e soiled.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 181
Picture no: 11647s.tif
If the wheel b olts have retaining
washers 3, they must not be removed.
6. Change the wheel. N otes on sp are
wheel see page 177, notes on
temporary sp are wheel see page 178.
7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly ,
inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
as possible.
8. Lower vehicle.
9. Tighten wheel bolts c rosswise, p utting on
wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.
6
182 Self-help, Vehicle Care
10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clea n the
wheel around the reta ining clips. The
valve symbol 3 on the ba ck of the
wheel trim m ust point toward s valv e on
wheel.
Align and refit wheel trim or w heel bolt
caps 3.
Alloy wheels 3:
Put hub cap on and engage, inserting
pin on rear of hub cap into relev ant hole
in wheel.
Alloy wheels with anti-theft lock 3:
Put hub cap on. Insert and tig hten
anti-theft loc k 3.
11. Stow the replaced wheel, vehicle tools
and warning triangle -
see pages 176, 177.
12. Chec k the ty re inflation pressure of the
newly fitted wheel. Adjust as necessary .
13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts on the new w heel checked on the
vehicle using a torque wrenc h as soon
as possible a nd, if necessary, corrected.
Tightening torq ue see p age 216.
14. Repla ce the faulty tyre on the wheel
tha t was remov ed.
15. Repla ce temporary spare wheel 3 with
a full specification wheel without delay .
Tyre repair kit 3
Minor d amage to the ty re tread and
sidewall, e.g. foreign bodies, can be
remedied with the tyre rep air kit.
Do not remove the foreig n body from the
tyre.
Ty re dama ge exceeding 4 mm or that is on
the rim ca nnot be rep aired w ith the tyre
repair k it.
9 Warning
Driving with tyre pressures that are too
low or deflated tyres can ca use inv isible
dam age to the ty re. This dama ge cannot Picture no: 17919S.tif
The tyre repair kit is in a stowage
be elim inated with a tyre repair kit. Park
compa rtm ent beneath the floor cover in
the vehicle and contact a work shop.
the lugg age compartment.
1. Remov e ba g containing ty re repair kit
Important information see page 185.
from stowag e comp artm ent. C arefully
In the event of a fla t tyre: remove parts from bag .
z Sw itch on haz ard warning lights a nd
2. Remov e the compressor.
apply handbrake. In v ehicles with
manual transmission, select 1st gear or
rev erse g ear (Easy tronic 3 in
position N or R).
z C orrectly set up the warning triangle.
Warning tria ngle see page 176.

Picture no: 13639T.tif
3. Remove the electrica l connection cable
and air hose from the stowage
com partments on the underside of the
com pressor.
Pict ure no: 15319t.tif
4. Sc rew the air compressor hose to the
connection on the sea la nt bottle.
5. Fit the seala nt b ottle in the retainer on
the compressor.
Set the com pressor nea r the tyre in such
a w ay that the sealant bottle is upright.
6. Remove the valv e cap from the defective
tyre.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 183
Picture no: 15795t.tif
7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.
8. The switch on the compressor must be
set to .
9. Plug the compressor connector into the
accessory soc ket or the cigarette lighter
socket. For accessory sockets, see
page 79.
184 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Pi cture no: 15796t.tif
10. Switch on ignition.
11. Set the rocker switc h on the
compressor to I. The tyre is filled with
sealant.
12. While the sea la nt bottle drains
(approx. 30 seconds) the pressure
ind icator on the compressor briefly
points to 6 bar (87 psi). Pressure then
sinks aga in.
13. All of the sealant is pumped into the
tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with
air.
14. The prescribed tyre pressure see
page 216, should be reached within
10 m inutes. Switch off the comp ressor
when the correct pressure is obtained.
Pict ure no: 15797t.tif
I f the specified tyre pressure is not
reached within 10 minutes, remove the
ty re repair kit. Move the vehicle through
one tyre rotation, a pprox. 2 metres, in
either direction. Reconnect the tyre
repair kit and continue the filling
process for 10 minutes. If the specified
ty re p ressure is still not reached, the tyre
is too badly da maged . Park the vehicle
and contac t a workshop .
Drain excess tyre pressure with the
button over the pressure indicator.
Do not run the com pressor for more
than 10 minutes, see "Imp ortant
information" on page 185.
15. Detac h the tyre repa ir kit. Sc rew the
filler hose to the free connection on the
sealant bottle. This prevents sealant
leak age. Stow the tyre repair k it in the
luggage compartment.
16. Wipe a way a ny sealant spill with a
cloth.
17. Dism antle the warning triangle and
stow it in the luggage compa rtm ent
see page 176.
18. The provid ed sticker shows the
max imum permitted speed at which the
vehicle m ay be driven after a ty re repair
has been made. Affix sticker in driver s
field of v iew.
19. Continue driving im media tely to a llow
the sea lant to distribute evenly
throughout the tyre. Stop after approx .
6 miles (10 km) or no more than 10
minutes, a nd chec k ty re pressure. S crew
the a ir compressor hose d irectly onto
the tyre valve (see Fig. 15798 T on nex t
page).

Pi cture no: 15798t.tif
As long a s the tyre pressure is more
tha n 1.3 bar (19 psi) it may be adjusted
to the prescribed v alue. Repeat the
procedure until there is no more
pressure loss.
If the ty re pressure has fallen below
1. 3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle may no
longer be used. Conta ct a workshop.
20. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage
compartment see page 182.
Imp or tant
9 Warning
Do not drive faster than 50 m ph
(80 k m/h).
Do not use the temporary spare w heel for
a lengthy period .
Steerability and driving b ehaviour may
be impaired.
Hav e the repaired tyre rep la ced as soon
as possible.
The driving com fort of the repaired tyre is
severely affected, therefore ha ve this tyre
replaced.
If the comp ressor ma kes abnormal noises
or hea ts up greatly , switch it off for at least
30 minutes.
The integrated safety valve opens at a
pressure of 7 bar (102 psi).
Protect the compressor from moisture and
ra in.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 185
The sealant can only be stored for
app rox . 4 years. After this time, the sealing
properties can no long er be guaranteed.
Heed the expiration date on the sealant
bottle.
The sealant bottle ca n only be used once.
Replace a used sealant bottle.
The compressor and sealant can be used
from app rox . -30 C.
Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in
acc orda nce with app lica ble legisla tion.
An adap ter for filling air mattresses, inner
tubes, etc. is located on the underside of
the compressor. Remove by unscrewing the
air com pressor hose and pulling out the
ada pter.
186 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Electrical system
9 Warning
Elec tronic ignition system s generate very
high v oltag es. Do not touch the ignition
system ; high voltage can be fatal.
Fuses
In the vehicle, there are two fuseboxes:
one in the v ehicle interior, below the
instrument panel, and a nother in the
engine b ay, in front of the w indscreen.
Picture no: 14725s.tif
We recommend carrying a complete set of
fuses.
Put spare fuses in the p rov id ed loca tion in
the fusebox in the instrument panel
(marked in yellow in the illustration). Open
cover see pa ge 188.
Before rep la cing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch a nd the ignition.
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 187

Alw ays use fuses with the specified rating. Fuse Fuse
This is shown on each fuse, and is also colour rating
indica ted b y the fuse colour and the plug-
Grey 2A
in loca tion in the fuseb ox .
Brow nish yellow 5A
Brow n 7.5 A
Red 10 A
Blue 15 A
Yellow 20 A
Light green 30 A
Pink (Maxi-Fuse) 30 A
Orange 40 A
Red (M axi-Fuse) 50 A
Pictu re no: 12892j.tif Yellow (Maxi-Fuse) 60 A
A defective fuse can be recog nized b y its Black (Max i-Fuse) 80 A
melted w ire. A new fuse should only be
installed after the cause of the trouble has
been rectified.
To help in replac ing fuses, there is a special
fuse-gripping tool in the fusebox 3.
Slot fuse-gripping tool onto fuse and
withdraw it.
188 Self-help, Vehicle Care

No. Circ uit Rat ing No. C ircuit Rating

4 Infota inment system, 20 A 17
diesel engine 18 Ada ptive Forward Lighting 15 A
5 (AFL)
6 19 C entral locking system 20 A
7 Starter, 10 A 20 I nterior lig hting, 5A
diesel engine: reading light
engine controller 21 Windscreen wash system 15 A
8 Horn 15 A 22 R ear electric w indows 20 A
9 Fuel injection sy stem, 20 A 23 S lide / tilt sunroof, 20 A
fuel pump, sky lig ht roof
sta tionary heater 24 Vauxhall alarm sy stem 5A
Pict ure no: 14211s.t if 10 Turn signal lights 20 A 25 R ear window w iper 15 A
Fuses and the m ost importan t 11 Infota inment system, 20 A 26 I gnition system, 15 A
circuits they protect Inform ation d isplay engine electronics
Fusebox in passenger compa rtment 12 Heated rear window, 7.5 A 27 Engine control, 5A
Disengage fusebox cover at bottom and ex terior mirrors a irb ags, ES PP lu s
rem ov e. 13 Central loc king , 10 A 28 Air conditioning sy stem 7. 5 A
Some circuits m ay be protected by severa l Va ux ha ll alarm system
fuses. 29 Front left electric window 20 A
14 Engine control
Petrol engine: 15 A 30
No. C ircuit Rating
Diesel engine: 7.5 A 31 Engine control, 7. 5 A
1 C entral control unit 7.5 A
15 Engine control unit, 10 A Z 17 DTH engine 10 A
2 Im mobiliser, 5A Z 17 DTH engine 15 A 32 Front rig ht elec tric wind ow 20 A
hazard warning lights,
exterior lighting 16 Accessory soc ket, 20 A
cigarette lighter
3 Headlight wash system 30 A
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 189

No. C ircuit Rating

33 C entral control module, 5A
imm obiliser,
control indicators
34 Windsc reen w iper 30 A
35 Interior lighting, 5A
interior mirror,
information displa y
36 Brak e light, ABS , ESP Pl us 15 A
37 C igarette lighter, 20 A
aux iliary heater
38 S eat heater (left) 15 A
39 S eat heater (right) 15 A Picture no: 14436s.tif Picture no:
40 Adap tiv e Forward Lighting 5 A No. Circ uit Rat ing No. C ircuit Rating
(AFL), 42 Engine cooling, 5A 51 Left dipped bea m:
automatic headlight ra ng e lighting Xenon headlight 15 A
ad justment
43 Left parking light 5A H alogen hea dlight 10 A
41 Reversing lights 15 A 52 R ig ht dipped beam :
44 Right parking light 5A
Xenon headlight 15 A
45 Fog tail light 10 A H alogen hea dlight 10 A
46 Front fog lights 15 A 53 S unroof, 5A
47 Towing equipm ent, 20 A electric wind ow s,
accessory socket rad io
48 Diesel filter heater 30 A 54 M ain beam (left) 10 A
49 55 M ain beam (right) 10 A
50 Diesel filter heater 30 A 56
190 Self-help, Vehicle Care

Bulb replacement
Before replac ing a bulb, switch ignition off
and switch relevant switch off.
O nly hold new bulb at base! Do not touch
the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass eva pora te.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadv ertently stained bulbs may be
cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
The replacement b ulb must b e in
acc orda nce with the data on the base of
the defective bulb. Do not exceed wattage
Pict ure no: 14213s.t if Picture no: 14214s.tif given on bulb base.
Fusebox in engine compa rtment The follow ing fuses are Max i fuses.
The fusebox is at the front of the eng ine Headl ight ai ming
No. Circ uit Rat ing
compartment, nea r the windscreen. We recommend that headlight adjustm ent
1 Interior fan 30 A be carried out by a workshop who will hav e
9 Warning 2 Electric Power S teering 50 A spec ia l equipment.
(EPS)
Turn off engine before opening fusebox, When adjusting headlights, head lig ht
3 ABS 40 A range adjustm ent must be set to 0.
risk of injury.
4 Easytronic, 60 A
diesel preheating sy stem 80 A
Disengage cover of fuseb ox from lug and
lift off. 5 Heated rear window 30 A

Some circuits m ay be protected by severa l 6 Engine cooling 50 A

fuses. 7 Starter 30 A
8 Engine cooling 40 A

Pict ure no: 16085s.t if
Halogen headlight system
Headlights w ith separate system s for
dipped beam 1 (bottom lights) and main
beam 2 (top lights).
Self-help, V ehicle Care 191
Picture no: 16086s.tif Picture no: 16087s.tif
Di pped beam 4. Press the bulb down in the hold er.
1. O pen bonnet and eng age support. 5. Remove bulb with connector from
reflector housing.
2. To replace the bulb on the left-hand
side, rem ov e the relay box.
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, rem ov e the air hose from the air
filter.
3. Rotate the headlight protective cover
anticlockwise and rem ov e.
192 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Pict ure no: 16088s.t if
6. Detach plug connector from bulb base.
7. Fit c onnec tor onto new bulb, without
touching the glass.
8. Insert the bulb with connector so that
the lug engages in the recess in the
reflec tor.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
10. Insert relay box a fter repla cing bulb at
left-hand side.
After rep la cing the bulb on the right-
hand sid e, reattach the air hose to the
air filter and engage.
Picture no: 16089s.tif Picture no: 16090s.tif
Main beam 4. Detac h plug connector from bulb.
1. O pen bonnet and eng age support. 5. Disengage sp ring wire clip from
retaining lugs by moving it forwards
2. To replace the bulb on the left-hand
and swivel it aside.
side, rem ov e the relay box.
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, rem ov e the air hose from the air
filter.
3. Rotate the headlight protective cover
anticlockwise and rem ov e.
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 193

Halogen headlight system 3,

Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) 3
Halogen headlight sy stem for dipped and
main bea m in combination with curve and
turn lighting.

9 Warning
We recommend having bulbs for dipped
beam, m ain b eam, turn lighting, parking
lights and turn sig na l lights replaced by a
workshop only .

Pict ure no: 16091s.t if Picture no: 14222s.tif

6. Rem ov e b ulb from reflector housing. Xenon headlight system
7. When fitting a new bulb , enga ge the Headlights with separate sy stems for
lug s in the recesses on the reflector dipp ed b eam 1 (b ottom lig hts) and ma in
without touching the gla ss. beam 2 (top lights).
8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector Dipp ed beam
onto b ulb.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
9 Warnin g
position and close. The dipped beam work s with very hig h
10. Insert relay box a fter repla cing bulb at electric al voltage. Do not touc h, risk of
left-hand side. fatal injury. Have bulbs changed by a
workshop.
After rep la cing the bulb on the right-
hand sid e, reattach the air hose to the
air filter and engage.
194 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Pict ure no: 14219s.t if
Mai n bea m
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.
2. Rem ov e headlight protective cover.
Picture no: 14220s.tif
3. Detach plug connector from bulb.
4. Disengag e spring wire clip from
retaining lug and swivel upw ard.
Picture no: 14221s.tif
5. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
6. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the
lugs in the rec esses on the reflector
without touching the g lass.
7. Engag e sp ring wire clip, p lug connector
onto bulb .
8. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
position and close.

Pict ure no: 16089s.t if
Parking lights
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.
2. To replace the bulb on the left-hand
side, remove the relay box .
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, remove the air hose from the air
filter.
3. Turn the main beam headlight cover
cap anticlockwise and rem ove.
For v ehicles with Xenon head lig ht
sy stem 3 , rem ov e the headlight cov er
cap see page 194, Fig. 14219 S.
Picture no: 16092s.tif
4. Push side lugs of parking light holder
together and remove hold er from
reflector.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 195
Picture no: 16093s.tif
5. Remove bulb from sock et.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert bulb socket in reflector.
8. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
position and close.
9. Insert relay box after replacing bulb on
left-hand side.
10. After replacing the b ulb on the right-
hand side, reattach the air hose to the
air filter and engage.
196 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Pict ure no: 16094s.t if
Fro nt turn signal lights
1. Open bonnet and engage supp ort.
2. To replace the bulb on the left-hand
side, remove the relay box .
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, remove the air hose from the air
filter.
3. Rotate left turn signal light bulb carrier
and disengage.
8. Rotate bulb carrier to right as far a s it
will go.
9. Insert relay box after rep lacing bulb at
left-hand side.
After replacing the b ulb on the right-
hand side, reattach the air hose to the
air filter and engage.
Side turn signal lights
Hav e b ulbs changed by a workshop.
Front fog lights 3
Hav e b ulbs changed by a workshop.
Picture no: 16095s.tif
4. Remove bulb mounting from reflector.
5. Detach bulb from bulb mounting.
6. I nsert new bulb into bulb m ounting,
without touc hing the glass.
7. I nsert new bulb so that the two lugs on
the bulb mounting engage in the
recesses in the reflector.

Picture no: 17953S.tif
Tail lights
1. Unscrew the four sc rews from the b ulb
housing using a screwdriver 3.
2. Pull bulb housing, reflec tor a nd fog tail
lig ht out of retainers to rear.
Picture no: 17954S.t if
3. Disengage the p lug of the main b ulb
mounting by p ressing (arrow in
illustration) and pull from bulb
mounting .
4. Disengage lug of fog tail light plug (see
arrow in illustration) and remove.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 197
Picture no: 17955S.tif
5. Slacken both sc rews on the ba ck of the
main bulb mounting. Press the ca tc hes
of the bulb m ounting together and
remove the bulb mounting.
6
198 Self-help, Vehicle Care

Pict ure no: 17956s.t if Picture no: 17957s.tif Picture no: 17900s.tif
Bulbs in ma in bulb mounting: Fog tail light bulb: Number plate ligh t
1 = Turn signal Rotate bulb mounting anticlockwise and 1. Insert screwdriver 3 v ertically on right-
2 = Brake light disengage. ha nd side of bulb housing, ex ert p ressure
3 = Tail light tow ards the right and disengag e spring .
Remove bulb from socket.
4 = Rev ersing light Remov e the bulb housing downwards.
6. Insert new bulb, being careful not to
Remove bulb from socket. touch the bulb g lass, and engage the
bulb m ounting in the b ulb housing .
7. Retighten both screws on the back of the
main b ulb mounting. Connect both
plugs. Insert bulb housing with retaining
pins to vehicle body and fasten housing
with the four screws.
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 199

5. Engage bulb holder by rotating right in

bulb housing. Insert b ulb housing and
engage.

Pict ure no: 14232s.t if Picture no: 14233s.tif

2. Rotate bulb holder to left and 3. Remove bulb from socket.
diseng age. 4. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the
glass.
200 Self-help, Vehicle Care

Rear c our tesy light,

rear read ing light s 3
Hav e b ulbs changed by a workshop.

Pict ure no: 11669s.t if Picture no: 11670s.tif

Courtesy lights 2. Remove bulb from socket.
Front courtesy li ght, readi ng lights 3 3. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the
To ensure that no power is supplied to the glass.
lights, close the d oors before rem oving .
4. Mount housing and engage in position.
1. Unclip the sca tter disc on the housing at
the point shown in the illustration.

Pictu re no: 12927j.tif
Glov e com part ment light ,
lugg age compa rtment li ght
To ensure that no power is supplied to the
lights, close the d oors or hold the contact
switch depressed before rem ov ing.
1. Prise the light out with a screwdriv er 3
and remov e.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 201
I nstrum ent illumi na tion,
I nform ation d isplay illumi nation
Hav e b ulbs changed by a workshop.
Picture no: 12928j.tif
2. Press bulb slig htly towards spring c lip
and remove.
3. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the
glass.
4. Insert light in opening a nd engage in
position.
202 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Vehicle care
When caring for your vehicle, observe all
nationa l environmental regulations,
particularly when washing it.
Regula r, thorough care helps to imp rov e
the a ppearance of your vehicle and
maintain its value ov er the years. It is also
a p rerequisite for warranty claims for any
paint or corrosion dam age.
The following pages conta in tips for vehicle
care which, if used properly, w ill help
combat the unav oida ble damaging effec ts
of the environm ent.
Vehicle ca re a ids 3 Washing
Vehicle wash: The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to
z Wash brush, env ironmental influenc es, e.g. c ontinuous
z C ar Shampoo, changes in w eather conditions, industrial
z C ar Sponges, waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so
z Insect Removal Sponge, wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly . When
z C ham ois Lea ther, using autom atic car wa shes, select a
z Wheel cleaners, programm e w hich includes w axing.
z Engine clea ners,
Bird d ropp ings, dead insec ts, resin, pollen
z Glass cleaners. and the like should be cleaned off
Vehicle care: imm ediately, a s they contain aggressive
z Paintwork Cleaner, constituents which can ca use paint
z Paintwork Polish, dam age.
z Metallic Paintw ork Wax, If using a car wash, comply with the
z Hard wax, pertinent instructions of the manufacturer
z Touch-up pens, of the car wash. Windscreen wiper and rear
z Touch-U p / Aerosol Paint, window w ip er must be switc hed off, see
z Wheel Preserver, pag es 11 and 12. Unscrew antenna 3 and
z Insect Remover, roof-mounted luggage carrier 3, stand on
z Window Cleaning Spray , door sill to reach them more ea sily.
z Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent,
z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals, If y ou wash your vehicle by hand, make
z C leaner, sure that the insides of the wings are also
z Alloy Wheel Cleaner, thoroughly rinsed out.
z Alloy Wheel Preserver, C lean edges and folds on opened doors
z Rust Preventa tiv e. and flaps as well as the a reas they cover.
Thoroughly rinse off a nd leather-off the
vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use
sepa ra te leathers for paint and window
surfac es: rem nants of wax on the windows
will im pair vision.
O bserve national regulations.

Waxing
Wax y our vehicle regularly, in particula r
after it ha s b een washed using shampoo,
and at the latest when water no longer
forms bead s on the paintwork, otherwise
the p aintwork will dry out.
Also wax edges and folds on opened doors
and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
Polishing
Polishing is necessary only if the paint has
become dull or if solid deposits have
become attached to it.
Paintwork polish w ith silicone forms a
protective film, making wa xing
unnecessary.
Plastic body p arts should not b e treated
with wax and polish.
Use M etallic Paintwork Wax on v ehicles
with a m etallic-effect paint finish.
Self-help, V ehicle Care 203
Wheels Exterior lights
Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to Headlight and other protectiv e light bezels
clean the wheels. are made of plastic. If they require
add itional cleaning after the vehicle has
Wheels are painted a nd can be treated
been wa shed , clean them w ith C ar
with the sam e agents as the body . For a lloy
S ham poo. Do not use any a brasiv e or
wheels, w e recommend use of Alloy Wheel
caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,
Preserver.
and d o not clean them dry.
Pa intwork dam age
Plastic and rubb er parts
Repair m inor p aintwork damage such as
If the car wash does not clean plastic and
stone chips, scratches etc. im mediately
rubber parts adeq ua tely, use cleaner
using a touch-up pen or spray, before rust
suita ble for vehicle interiors. Do not use any
forms. I f rust has alread y formed, have a
other a gent, and in particular do not use
work shop eliminate the cause. Also check
solvents or petrol.
the surfaces and edges facing the roa d
surface on which rust m ay have d eveloped
Wheels a nd tyr es
unnoticed for some time.
Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on
wheels and tyres.
204 Self-help, Vehicle Care
Interior and upholstery
Clean the v ehicle interior, includ ing the
instrument panel facia, using interior
cleaner.
The instrum ent panel should only be
cleaned using a soft damp cloth.
Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum
cleaner and b rush. To rem ove stains, use
cleaner that is suita ble for both fab ric s and
vinyl.
Do not use cleaning agents such a s
acetone, tetrachloride, p aint thinner, paint
rem ov er, na il varnish remover, washing
powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.
O pen Velcro fasteners on clothing could
dam age seat upholstery . Mak e sure that
Velcro fasteners are closed.
Seat belts
Alw ays keep seat belts clean and dry.
Clea n only with luk ewarm water or C leaner.
Wi nd ows
When cleaning the heated rear w indow,
make sure that the hea ting element on the
inside of the window is not dama ged.
Use a soft lint-free c loth or cham ois leather
in conjunction with Window Cleaning Spray
and Insect Remover.
Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is
suitable for defrosting w indows.
For mechanical rem oval of ice, use a
commerc ia lly availab le sharp-edg ed ice
scraper. Press the scraper firmly ag ainst
the glass so that no dirt c an get under it
and scra tch the glass.
Windscreen wiper b lades
Wax, such as that used in car w ashes, can
cause strea king on the windscreen when
the wiper is used.
S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with
a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen
Wash Solvent, and rep la ced if necessary
see page 233.
Locks
The locks are factory-lubricated with a hig h
quality lock cylinder grease. This p revents
the lock s from freezing. O nly use de-icer in
urgent c ases as this destroys the grease
and d amages the func tion of the loc ks.
After using de-ic er, hav e a workshop
regrease the locks.
 Self-help, V ehicle Care 205

Eng ine compar tment Underbody C aution - comm ercially ava ilab le bitum en /
Look after areas in the engine Your vehicle has a factory-app lied PVC rubber materials can damage the PVC
compartment that are p ainted in the same undercoating in the wheel arches coating. We recom mend that y ou ha ve
colour as the vehicle like any other (including the longitudinal mem bers) which underbody work ca rried out by a
paintwork. prov ides permanent protec tion and needs workshop, who knows the p rescrib ed
no special maintenance. The surfaces of ma terials and has ex perience in the use
It is adv isable to wash the engine
the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC thereof.
compartment before and after winter and
are provided with a durable p rotective wax
preserve it with wax. Before engine The underbody should be washed
coating in critic al areas.
washing, cover alternator and brak e fluid following the end of the cold weather
reserv oir with plastic sheeting. On vehicles which are washed frequently in season to remov e any dirt adhering to the
autom atic car washes with underbody underbody since this may also contain salt.
When washing the engine with a steam-jet
washing facility, the protective wax C heck p rotective wax c oa ting and , if
cleaner, do not d irect the steam jet at
coating may b e impaired by d irt-dissolv ing nec essary , have it restored to perfec t
components of the Anti-lock Brak e
additives, so check the underbody after condition.
Sy stem (ABS), the automatic air
washing and ha ve it waxed if necessary .
conditioning sy stem 3 or the b elt driv e and
Before the start of the cold weather season,
its components.
check the PVC c oa ting a nd protective wax
Engine washing also rem ov es subsequently coating and, if necessary , have them
applied protec tiv e wa x. Therefore after restored to perfect condition.
washing, have a workshop protect the
engine, parts of the b ra king sy stem in the
engine bay, axle elements with steering ,
body elements and cav ities, thoroughly
with protective wax .
An engine wash can be performed in the
spring in ord er to remove dirt that has
adhered to the engine compartment,
which may also ha ve a high sa lt content.
Check p rotective wax layer and make good
if necessary.
Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners in the
engine compartment.
206 Tec hnic al D ata

Technical Data Veh icle documents,

identification plate
The tec hnical d ata is determined in
accordance with European C ommunity
standards. We reserve the right to make
modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le
docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those
given in this manual.

Vehicle docum ents, identification

plate. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 206 Picture no: 14247s.tif
Vehicle identification d ata.... .... .... ..... . 207 The identification plate is affixed to the
Coolant, b ra ke fluid, oils .. ..... .... .... ..... . 207 front right door fram e.
Engine data. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 208
Performance.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 210
Fuel consump tion, CO 2 emissions ..... . 212
Weights, pay loa d and roof load .. ..... . 214
Tyres ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 216
Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 218
Ca pacities ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 219
Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 221
Mounting dimensions of towing
equipment 3. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 222

Pictu re no: 13329j.tif
Information on id entific ation p la te:
1 Manufac turer
2 Type approval number
3 Vehic le Id entific ation N umber
4 Gross Vehicle Weight rating
5 Permissible Gross Train Weight
6 Maximum permissib le front axle load
7 Maximum permissib le rear axle load
8 Vehic le-specific or country-specific
data
Technical Data 207
Coolant, brake flu id, oils
O nly use app rov ed fluids.
Use of unsuitab le fluids can cause serious
dam age to the vehicle.
Engine oils
Information on engine oils is found in the
S ervice Booklet.
Picture no: 14249s.tif
Veh icle identific ation data
The Vehicle Identification Number is
stamp ed on the identification plate (see
previous page) and in the v ehicle floor on
the right-hand side under a cover between
the drivers door and seat.
In other model variants, the id entifica tion
plate may also be affix ed to the instrument
panel.
Engine id entifier and engine number:
marked on left-hand side of engine in
engine b lock .
208 Tec hnic al D ata

Engine data
Sales designation 1.4 TWIN PORT 1. 6 TWIN PORT 1. 8 VXR
Eng ine identifier code Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 16 LET

Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4
Piston displacement (cm 3) 1364 1598 1796 1598

Brake horse power (b hp ) 66 77 92 132

at rpm 5600 6000 6000 5500

Torque (Nm ) 125 150 165 230

at rpm 4000 3900 4600 2200-5400

Type of fuel1 ) Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol

O ctane requirement (RO N) 2 )
unleaded 95 3 ) 95 3) 95 3) 95 3 )5)
or unleaded 98 3 ) 98 3) 98 3) 98 3 )
or unleaded 91 3 )4) 91 3 )4) 91 3 )4) 6)
Max . permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm ) approx. 6200 6500 6500 6500
O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0. 6 0. 6 0. 6

1)
Stan da rd qu ality fuels, e.g . unlead ed D IN EN 228.
2)
Bold type: reco mmen ded fuel.
3)
Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber).
4)
Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 91 R ON is used .
5)
Slight reduction in engine ou tp ut a nd to rq ue if 95 R ON is used .
6)
Do no t use fuel of octa ne num ber 91 RON .
 Technical Data 209

Engine data
Sales designation 1.3 CDTI 1.7 C DTI
Eng ine code Z 13 DTJ Z 17 DTH

Numb er of cylinders 4 4
Piston displacement (cm 3) 1248 1686

Brake horse power (b hp ) 55 74

at rpm 4000 4400

Torque (Nm ) 170 240

at rpm 1750 to 2500 2300

Type of fuel1 ) Diesel Diesel

Cetane requirement (CN) 2 ) 49 (D) 3) 49 (D)3 )

Max . permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rp m) approx. 5100 to 5300 4700

O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6

1)
Stan da rd qu ality fuels, e.g . diesel DIN EN 590.
2)
Stan da rd qu ality fuels: D = d ies el, b old type: recom mend ed fuel
3)
A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter diesel fu els.
210 Tec hnic al D ata

Performance
(approx. mph / km/h 1))
Eng ine 2 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 16 LET

Top speed
5-speed ma nual transmission 104 / 168 112 / 181 118 / 190
5-speed sports transmission 119 / 192
6-speed ma nual transmission 138 / 222
Easytronic 112 / 181 118 / 190

1)
The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle.
2)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 8.
 Technical Data 211

Performance
(approx. mph / km/h 1))
Eng ine 2 ) Z 13 DTJ Z 17 DTH

Top speed
5-speed ma nual transmission 98 / 157 111 / 178
6-speed ma nual transmission
Easytronic

1)
The ma xim um s peed is a ch ieva ble with a m aximum of h alf p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent m ay reduce th e specified m aximum speed of the vehicle.
2)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 9.
212 Tec hnic al D ata

Fuel consumption,
CO 2 emission s
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by
1999/100/EC) has ap plied for the
measurement of fuel consumption
since 1996.
The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving
practices: Urba n driving is rated at
approx. 1/ 3 and extra-urban driving at
approx. 2/ 3 (urban and extra-urban
consumption). C old sta rts a nd acceleration
phases are also taken into considera tion.
The specification of CO 2 emission is also a
constituent of the directive.
The figures given m ust not be taken as a
guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
of a p artic ular vehicle.
All values are b ased on the EU base model
with standard equipment.
The calculation of fuel consumption as
spec ified by directive 1999/100/EC takes
acc ount of the v ehicle s kerbweight,
ascertained in accordance with the said
regula tion. Optional ex tras may result in
slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2
emission lev els than those quoted.
To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282
by num ber of litres/100 km.
S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent
see page 140.
 Technical Data 213

Fuel cons umption, CO2 emis sions

Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 16 LET

5-speed /S ports/6-speed /Easytronic transm ission

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km )
Urban 8.3/ // 8.8/// 8. 9 10.9/10.9//10.7 //10.4/
Ex tra-urb an 5.3/ // 5.5/// 5. 4 6.1/ 6.6// 6. 1 // 6.3/
Com bined 6.4/ // 6.7/// 6. 7 7.9/ 8.2// 7. 8 // 7.8/
CO 2 emission (app rox . g/km)
Urban 199/ // 211///214 262/ 262// 257 // 250/
Ex tra-urb an 127/ // 132///130 146/ 158// 146 // 151/
Com bined 154/ // 161///161 190/ 196// 187 // 187/

Eng ine 1 ) Z 13 DTJ Z 17 DTH

5-speed /S ports /6-speed/Easytronic transm ission

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km )
Urban 6.2// / 6.6/ //
Ex tra-urb an 4.3// / 4.4/ //
Com bined 5.0// / 5.2/ //
CO 2 emission (app rox . g/km)
Urban 167/// 178/ //
Ex tra-urb an 116/// 119/ //
Com bined 135/// 140/ //

1)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 8, 209.
214 Tec hnic al D ata

Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front a nd rear ax le Roof loa d
The p ayload is the difference between the loa ds must not exceed the perm issible The permissib le roof load is 75 kg.
permitted Gross Vehic le Weight (see Gross Vehicle Weight. For exam ple, if the The roof load consists of the weight of the
identification plate, page 206) and the EC front ax le is bearing its m aximum roof rack p lus the load carried.
kerbweight. permissib le load, the rear axle can only
bear a load that is eq ua l to the Gross Driving hints see page 138.
To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data Vehicle Weight m inus the front axle load. Roof racks 3 see page 163.
for your vehicle below:
When the tra iler is coupled and the towing
z Kerb weight from vehicle fully loaded (including a ll
Ta ble 1, oc cup ants), the permissible rear axle load
page 215 +.... .... ..... . kg (see identification plate or vehic le
z Weight of heavy docum ents) may be exceeded by 25 kg
accessories from and the permissible Gross Vehicle Weight
Ta ble 2, by 25 kg.
page 215 +.... .... ..... . kg If the permissible rear axle loa d is
The total =.... .... ..... . kg exc eeded, a max imum speed of 60 mph
(100 km/h) a pplies. If national regula tions
is the EC k erbweight. specify a low er ma ximum speed for
O ptional equipment and accessories vehicles towing a trailer, this must be
increase the kerbweight, w hich means that ob served.
the p ayload will also change slig htly. See the identification plate or v ehicle
Note weig ht ra nges in the vehicle docum ents for permissib le ax le loads.
documents and on the rating plate.
 Technical Data 215

Table 1, Kerbweight in kg 1)
Model Eng ine2 ) M anual Easy tronic
transmission
Meriv a Z 14 XEP 1330
Z 16 XEP 1375 1375

Z 18 XE 1380 1380
Z 16 LET 1380 1380

Z 13 DTJ 1393
Z 17 DTH 1455
Meriv a Z 14 XEP 1355
wi th air
condit ioning Z 16 XEP 1400 1400
system Z 18 XE 1405 1405
or Electronic
Cl imate C ontrol Z 16 LET 1400 1400
(EC C) system
Z 13 DTJ 1418
Z 17 DTH 1480

Table 2, Weight of heavy accessories in kg

Accessories Towing equi pment

Weight 25

1)
According to EC D irective 70/ 156/EC, includ ing a ssum ed w eig hts fo r d river (68 kg ), lug ga ge (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).
2)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 8, 209.
216 Tec hnic al D ata
Tyres
Restricti ons
Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market
currently meet the structural requirem ents.
We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning
suitab le tyre mak es.
These ty res have und ergone special tests
to establish their reliab ility , safety and
specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles.
Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we
are unab le to assess these attributes for
other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted
approva l by the relevant authorities or in
som e other form.
Further information see pa ge 158.
Winter tyres 3
Tyres of size 205/50 R 16 are not suitable
for use as winter ty res ex cept on v ehicles
with the Z 16 LET 1 ) engine.
Tyres of size 205/45 R 17 are not suitable
for use as winter ty res.
1)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 8, 209.
If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel
may still be fitted w ith a summ er ty re. Use
of the spare w heel may a lter vehicle
ha ndling. Obtain a replacement for the
fa ulty tyre as soon as possible, and hav e
the wheel balanced and fitted to the
vehicle.
Further inform ation see page 162.
Tyre ch ains 3
Ty re c hains may be used on the front
wheels only.
We rec om mend the use of fine-link chains
whic h add no more than 10 m m to the
tread a nd tyre inner wall with (includ ing
cha in lock ).
Ty re chains are not perm itted on tyre sizes
205/50 R 16 a nd 205/45 R 17.
Further inform ation see page 162.
Wheels
Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 N m.
Spare wheel 3
Depending on design, the spare wheel is
designed as a temporary spare wheel 3 .
When using the spare wheel, the d riv ing
behaviour may be modified. Replace the
faulty tyre as soon a s possible, b alance the
wheel and refit to vehicle. Follow the notes
on this page and on pages 162, 178.
O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3, the sp are
wheel m ay have a steel rim.
The spare wheel ma y be fitted w ith a
smaller ty re 2) a nd a smaller w heel than the
wheels fitted to the vehicle.
Tyre pressure in bar / psi 3)
The specified ty re pressures are valid for
cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure
resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not
be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on
the following pages ap ply to both summer
and w inter tyres.
The spare wheel m ust a lways be inflated to
the tyre p ressure for a full load see table
on nex t page.
Further information
see pages 158 to 162.
2)
Co untry-specific version: In so me countries,
the s pa re w heel m ay on ly b e used a s a
tem porary spa re wheel.
3)
1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si.
 Technical Data 217

(ctd.) Ty re pressure Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) for load of for full load
up to 3 persons
Engine1 ) Ty res Front Rear Front Rear
Z 14 XEP 175/70 R 14, 2.4/35 2.2/32 2. 6/38 3.0/44
185/60 R 15,
205/50 R 16,
205/45 R 17
Z 16 XEP 185/60 R 15, 2.4/35 2.2/32 2. 6/38 3.0/44
205/50 R 16,
205/45 R 17
Z 18 XE 185/60 R 15, 2.4/35 2.2/32 2. 6/38 3.0/44
205/50 R 16,
205/45 R 17
Z 16 LET 185/55 R 16 2 ), 2.8/41 2.6/38 3. 0/44 3.4/49
195/50 R 16 2 ),
205/50 R 16,
205/45 R 17
Z 13 DTJ 185/60 R 15, 2.4/35 2.2/32 2. 6/38 3.0/44
205/50 R 16,
205/45 R 17
Z 17 DTH 185/60 R 15, 2.6/38 2.4/35 2. 8/41 3.2/46
205/50 R 16,
205/45 R 17

1)
Sales d esigna tion s ee p a ge 208, 209 .
2)
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. Only permitted a s winter tyres.
218 Tec hnic al D ata

Electrical system

Battery Voltage 12 Volt

Amp hours 44 Ah / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3

Battery for rad io frequency remote control CR 20 32

 Technical Data 219

Capacities
(approx. litres)

Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 16 LET

Fuel tank (nominal content) 53 53 53 53

Engine oil with filter change 3. 5 4.5 4.25 4.5

Engine oil betw een MIN a nd MAX

on dipstick 1. 0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Wind screen wash system reservoir 2. 1 2.1 2.1 2.1

Headlight wash sy stem reservoir 3 3. 5 3.5 3.5 3.5

1)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 8, 209.
220 Tec hnic al D ata

Capacities
(approx. litres)

Eng ine 1 ) Z 13 DTJ Z 17 DTH

Fuel tank (nominal content) 53 53

Engine oil with filter change 3. 2 5. 0

Engine oil betw een MIN a nd MAX

on dipstick 1. 0 1. 0

Wind screen wash system reservoir 2. 1 2. 1

Headlight wash sy stem reservoir 3 3. 2 3. 5

1)
Sa les desig nation see pa ge 20 8, 209.
 Technical Data 221

Dimensions
(mm)
Meriva Meriva VXR

O verall length 4052 4068

O verall w id th 1694 1694

Width inc luding tw o exterior mirrors 1948 1948

O verall height 1624 1624

Length of luggage compartment floor 861 861

Lug gage compartment width 1034 1034

Height of lug gage comp artm ent opening 832 832

Wheelb ase 2630 2630

Turning c ircle diam eter 1 ) 10.42 10.42

1)
In metres.
222 Tec hnic al D ata

Mounting dimensions of Di mensi on mm Dim ension mm

towing equipment 3
All measurements refer to Va ux ha ll- A 468 O 425
approved towing equipment.
B 727 P 378
9 Warning
C 508.1 Q 14
Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for
D 471.5 R 16
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
retro-fitting of towing equipment to a E 441.4 S 69
work shop.
F 497.6 T 76

G 496.6 U 430

H 35.1

I 50.1

J 36.4

K 90

L 142.6

M 585

N 568
Technical Data 223
224 Service, Maintenance
Service, Maintenance
Inspection system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and
Accessories ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
A note on safety .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Checking and topping up fluids ... ..... .
Engine oil . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Coolant .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Brake fluid ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Wind screen and headlight wash
sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .
Protecting electronic components .... .
Vehicle decomm issioning. ..... .... .... ..... .
Vehicle recommissioning.. ..... .... .... ..... .
In our ex perience, the most com mon cause
of all complaints is the result of
misunderstanding or lack of
communication betw een the customer a nd
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
We sincerely hope y ou will never have
cause to complain ab out y our vehicle.
However, if things do go wrong, the best
course of action for y ou to ta ke is to
contact your Vaux hall Authorised
Repairers Serv ice Reception S taff and
exp la in the difficulty you are having. We
are confident they will d o their utmost to
resolv e the problem to your complete
226
satisfaction.
227 Sometim es, howev er, despite the best of
227 intentions of all concerned,
228 misunderstandings can occur. If y our
prob lem has not been resolved to y our
228
satisfaction, please make an appointment
230
to discuss the matter with the M ana ger of
230
the department c oncerned.
232
The majority of areas of concern can be
233
quic kly resolved in this way.
234 Should you wish to pursue the matter
235 further, the Principal of the Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer should be made
236
aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in
237
cases such as this to write to him to confirm
237
your problem and the solutions that have
been offered.
You can be assured the Authorised
Repairers Principal w ill only be too anxious
to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and
correct any errors mad e. After all, he has a
large investment in his business a nd is
proud of his reputation and
professionalism and fully realises that
satisfied customers are his key to success.
In the unlikely event that you are still not
happy with the answer your Vaux hall
Authorised Repa irer has given, or the
action he proposes to c orrect the problem ,
y ou m ay contact the Custom er C are
Department 1 ) where a team of C ustomer
C are C onsultants will spare no effort to
ensure y our complete satisfaction.
Vauxhall Motor s Ltd.
C ustomer Care,
Griffin House,
O sborne Road,
LUTON ,
Beds. , LU1 3Y T
Telephone: 0845 090 2044
They w ill review all the facts involved. Then
if it is felt some further action can be tak en,
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e
adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our
contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing
Vauxhall Motors position in the m atter.
If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome,
y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an
independent third p arty suc h as:
Autom obile Association (A. A. )
Fanum House,
BASI NGSTO KE,
Hants., R G21 2EA
1)
Ca lls may b e mon itored a nd record ed for
training purpo ses.

Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C. ),
R.A.C . Motoring Services Ltd.,
89-91 Pall Mall,
LON DO N, SW1Y S 45
The C ustomer Rela tions Depa rtm ent,
Soci ety of Motor Manufacturers and
Traders Ltd. (S .M.M. T. ),
Forbes House, Ha lk in Street,
LON DO N, SW1X 7DS
Customer C omplaints Serv ice,
Scot tish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion,
(S.M .T.A.),
3 Palmerston Place,
EDI NBURGH, EH12 5AQ
The N ationa l Conciliation Service,
Retail Motor Ind ust ry Fed era tion,
9 North Street,
RUGBY , CV21 2AB
If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d:
The S ervice Departments of ADAM O PEL
GmbH and General Motors branches
everyw here will provide information and
assistance:
In Luxemb ourg please contact
the General M otors Service Department in
Antwerp Belg ium
Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29
General Motors Austria GmbH
Gro-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59
1220 Vi enna Austria
Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or
00 43-1-2 88 77 0
General Motors Belgium N.V.
Noorderlaan 401 Haven 500
2030 Antw erp Belgium
Telep hone 00 32-34 50 63 29
General Motors Southeast Europe,
org. slo ka
Olbrachtova 9
140 00 Prague C zech Republ ic
Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321
General Motors Denm ark
Jaegersborg Alle 4
2920 C harlottenlund Denm ark
Telep hone 00 45-39 97 85 00
Vauxhall M otors Ltd .
Customer Ca re
Griffin House, O sborne Road
Luton, Bedfor dshi re, LU1 3YT Engla nd
Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044
General Motors Finland Oy
Pa juniityntie 5
00320 Helsinki Finl and
Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47
General Motors Franc e
1 9, avenue du M arais
Angle Q ua i de Bezons
95101 Argenteuil C edex France
Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51
ADAM OPEL Gm bH
Bahnhofsp la tz 1
65423 Rsselsheim Germ any
Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or
00 49-61 42-7 70
Servic e, Mainten ance 225
General Motors Hellas S. A.
56 Kifisia s Av enue & Delfon str.
Amarousion
151 25 Athens Greece
Tel 00 30-1-6 80 65 01
General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.
S zabadsag utca 117
2040 Budars H ung ary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
General Motors India
S ix th Floor, Tower A, Global Business Park
Mehra uli Gurgaon Road
Gurga on 122 022, Har yana India
Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333
General Motors Ireland Ltd.
O pel House, Unit 60, Heather Road
Sa ndyford , Dublin 18 Ireland
Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00
General Motors Italia Srl
Piazza le dellIndustria 40
00144 Rome It aly
Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51
General Motors Ned erland B. V.
Lage Mosten 49 63
4822 NK Breda N et herla nds
Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00
General Motors Norge AS
K jeller-Vest 6
2027 Kj el ler Norw ay
Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04
General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Domaniewsk a 41
06- 672 Wa rsa w Pola nd
Tel. 00 48- 22-606 17 00
226 Service, Maintenance
General Motors Portugal
Q uinta d a Fonte
Ed ifico Ferno M agalhes, Piso 2
2780-190 Pa o dArc os Portugal
Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00
General Motors S outheast Europe,
org. z lok a
Apollo Business Centre
Mlynsk Nivy 45
821 09 Bra tislav a S lovak ia
Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543
General Motors Espaa S. L.
Paseo de la C astellana, 91
28046 M adrid Spa in
Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25
General Motors N orden AB
rsta ngv gen 17
100 73 S tockhol m S weden
Tel. 00 46-20 333 000
General Motors S uisse S .A.
Stelzenstrae 4
8152 Glatt brugg Swit zerland
Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80
General Motors Trkiy e Ltd. S ti.
Kemalpa sa y olu z eri
35861 Torb ali/Izmir Tur key
Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53
In Alb ania, Bosnia-H erzegovina ,
Bulga ria, C roatia, Estonia, La tvia ,
Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania ,
Serbia -Monteneg ro and Sl ov enia
please contact the
General Motors S ervice Department in
Budars Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Picture no: 17901s.tif
In spec tion system
In order to guarantee econom ical and safe
vehicle operation and to m ainta in the
value of y our v ehicle, it is of vital
importanc e that all maintenance work is
carried out at the proper intervals as
specified.
For vehicles with fixed oil change and
service intervals, InSP appea rs in the
od om eter disp la y when the ignition is
turned on before the service work b ecomes
due: arra nge for the next S ervice to be
performed by a w orkshop within one week
or 300 miles (500 km ).
The service interval display takes acc ount
of off-the-road periods during which the
battery is disconnected.
For vehicles with flexib le engine oil change
and serv ice intervals, the length of these
interva ls is based on several parameters
stemm ing from usage. For this reason,
va rious engine-specific data is continually
gathered a nd is used to calculate the
remaining distance until the nex t Service.
The distance rem aining c an be displa yed
with the ig nition turned off: press the reset
button for the trip odometer for app rox .
2 seconds, InS P and the remaining
distance appea r (see Fig. 17901 S).
If the rema ining d istance is less than
1000 miles (1500 km ), InSP is displayed
with a remaining distance of 600 miles
(1000 km) when the ignition is sw itched on
and off. I nSP is disp layed for severa l
seconds if the remaining distance is less
than 600 m iles (1000 km). Hav e the service
work that is due carried out within one
week or 300 miles (500 k m). Have this work
carried out by a Va ux hall Authorised
Repairer in order to avoid inva lid ation of
warranty claims.

Further information on maintenance and
the Service Plan ca n be found in the S ervice
Booklet, which is in the glove comp artm ent.
Hav e serv ic e work and repa irs to the
bodyw ork and components performed
properly b y a work shop and in accordance
with Vauxhall Motors recommendations,
using Genuine Vauxhall Parts a nd
Accessories. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who has ex cellent
knowled ge of Vauxhall vehicles and is in
possession of the nec essary tools and
current Service Instructions from Vauxhall.
To exclude the possibility of loss of
warranty, use of a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer is rec om mended in particular
during the w arra nty period. For further
inform ation, see the Service Book let.
Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce
Hav e the work performed b y a workshop at
the interv als specified in the Service
Booklet.
Servic e, Mainten ance 227
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and
Accessories
We rec om mend that you use "Genuine
Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" a nd
conv ersion p arts released ex pressly for
your vehicle type. These parts ha ve
undergone spec ia l tests to establish their
reliability, safety a nd specific suitability for
Vauxhall v ehicles. Despite continuous
market monitoring, we ca nnot assess or
guarantee these attributes for other
prod uc ts, even if they hav e b een granted
approval by the releva nt authorities or in
some other form.
"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" Picture no: 17922S.tif
and conversion parts approved by A note on safety
Vauxhall c an be ob tained from y our To av oid injury from moving parts and
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho c an cab les conduc ting ignition voltage, only
prov ide expert adv ic e on permitted carry out engine c om partment checks
technical changes and ensure correct (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil
installation. level) when the ignition is switched off.
9 Warnin g
The cooling fan is controlled by a
thermosw itc h and can therefore start
unexpectedly ev en if the ig nition is
switched off. Risk of injury .
Electronic ignition system s generate very
hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
228 Service, Maintenance
Pict ure no: 14234s.t if
Never carry out any repairs or adjustm ent
and m aintenance work on the vehic le
yourself. This especia lly applies to the
engine, chassis and safety parts. You may
unwittingly infringe the provisions of the
law a nd , by not performing the work
properly , end ang er y ourself and other
road users.
Checking and to pping up fluids
To aid id entific ation, the caps used when
topping up engine oil, coolant and w ash
fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured
yellow.
Picture no: 16486s.tif
Engine oil
Information on eng ine oils is found in the
Serv ic e Booklet.
Engine oil l ev el and consumpt ion
Every engine consum es engine oil for
technical rea sons. The oil consum ption
cannot b e assessed until a fairly long
distance has been driven, and ma y be
above the specified value when the v ehicle
is first being driv en (run-in p eriod).
Frequent driving at high revs increases
engine oil c onsumption.
In vehicles w ith engine oil level check 3 , the
engine oil level is checked automatically -
see p age 88. It is p artic ularly advisable to
check the engine oil lev el b efore emb arking
on a long journey.
Picture no: 16487s.tif
Engine oil level check , topp ing up
engine oil
The oil level must be checked with the
vehicle on a level surface and w ith the
eng ine (which must be at operating
temperature) switched off. Wait at least
5 minutes before chec king the level, to
allow the norm al oil accumulation in the
eng ine to drain into the oil pa n.
9 Warnin g
Important: It is the owners responsibility
to maintain the correc t level of an
appropriate qua lity oil in the engine.
 Servic e, Mainten ance 229

Pict ure no: 17903s.t if Picture no: 15972s.tif Picture no: 14238s.tif
To check the engine oil level, insert wiped Top up with the same brand of engine oil Engine oil change, oi l filter chang e
oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will that was used during the previous oil Hav e oil c hanged by a workshop as a
go. Top engine oil up if the lev el has cha ng e, following the instruc tions in the function of the service interval d isplay .
dropped into the range of the top -up m ark Serv ic e Booklet. We recommend that you use g enuine
MIN . To close, position the cap and screw it into eng ine oil filters.
The engine oil level must not exceed the place.
upper mark M AX on the dipstick. Excess Capacities see page 219.
engine oil must be drained off or extracted.
If the engine oil level is above the MAX
mark, there is a risk of damag e to the
engine or the ca ta lytic converter.
The a mount filled must be between the
MIN and MA X marks see pag e 219.

9 Warning
Do not allow the engine oil to drop below
the minimum level!
230 Service, Maintenance

Diesel fuel filter Coolant

At each eng ine oil chang e, hav e the d iesel The glycol-based coolant p rov id es
fuel filter 3 c hecked for any wa ter residue excellent corrosion protection for the
by a workshop. hea ting and cooling sy stems as well a s
anti-freeze protection down to 28 C.
Illum ination of control ind icator A
It rema ins in the cooling sy stem throughout
indica tes water in the diesel fuel filter.
the yea r and need not be changed.
Have diesel fuel filter checked at shorter
Use of certain anti-freez es can lead to
intervals if the vehicle is subjected to
eng ine damage. We therefore recommend
extreme opera ting conditions, such as high
that you use only approved anti-freez es.
humidity (primarily in coastal areas),
extremely high or low outside
temperatures, and substa ntially varying
9 Warnin g
daytime and night-time temperatures.
Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must
Pict ure no: 17902s.t if therefore be kept in the original container
and out of the reach of children.
9 Warning
Used engine oil cannot be disposed of
with domestic refuse. Observ e the legal
requirements for disposal of old oil and
filters, to protect the environment and
your health.

Pict ure no: 17905s.t if
Anti-fr eeze a nd corrosion protect ion
Before the start of winter, have a w orkshop
check the a nti-freeze protection. The anti-
freeze level must guarantee protection
down to app rox . -28 C. Insufficient anti-
freeze will reduce the frost protection level
and the corrosion protection. If necessa ry ,
add anti-freeze.
If coolant loss is topped up with water,
have concentration checked and ad d anti-
freeze if necessary.
Servic e, Mainten ance 231
When the engine is at op erating
temperature, coolant lev el rises. It falls
aga in when the system cools. If it falls
below the KALT/C OLD mark when the
system is cold, top up to the mark.
Top up a nti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is
av ailable, top up with clean tap water. If
tap water is unavailable, distilled water
can b e used.
After filling with tap water or d istilled
water, measure the anti-freeze
concentration and ad d anti-freez e if
required. H ave a workshop establish the
cause of the coolant loss.
Picture no: 17904s.tif Too low a coolant level can cause engine
Coolant lev el
dam age.
Hardly a ny losses occur since the cooling
sy stem is sealed , and it is thus ra rely To close, position the cap and screw it into
necessary to top up the coolant. place.
The coolant should be a little above the
KALT/COLD ma rk in the expansion tank
with a cold cooling system. The coolant
level can also be read off from the outsid e
of the ex pansion tank.
9 Warning
Allow engine to cool down before
rem oving coolant filler cap. Rem ov e
coolant filler cap carefully so that
pressure can escape slowly, otherwise
there is a risk of scalding.
232 Service, Maintenance

Coola nt temperat ure Use of certain brake fluids can lead to

If the temperature ga uge enters the red dam age or reduced braking effect. We
zone, check the coola nt level im med ia tely. therefore rec om mend that you use only
app rov ed high-performance brake fluid.
z Coolant level too low:
Ad d coolant. See notes under "Anti- Absolute cleanliness is important when
freeze and c orrosion p rotection" and topping up, since contamination in the
"Coolant lev el". Have a w orkshop brak e fluid can c ause brake sy stem
eliminate the cause of the coolant loss. ma lfunctions.
z Coolant OK : After c orrecting the brak e fluid level, have
Have the cause of the raised c oolant a work shop eliminate the cause of the
temperature elim ina ted. Contact a brak e fluid loss.
work shop.

Picture no: 14765s.tif

Brake fluid
Brake fluid lev el
9 Warning
Brake fluid is poisonous a nd corrosive.
Do not allow it to come into contact with
eyes, skin, fab ric or painted surfaces.
Direct contac t could cause injury and
dam age.

The brake fluid lev el in the reservoir m ust

be neither higher than the MAX mark nor
low er than the M IN m ark.

Brak e fluid chang e
Brake fluid is hy groscopic, i.e. it absorbs
water. If the brakes b ecome hot, suc h as
when d riv ing on long downhill stretches,
vap our bubb les can occur in the w ater
which can have an extrem ely adverse
effect on braking power (depending on the
proportion of w ater).
The b ra ke fluid c hange intervals spec ified
in the S ervice Booklet must therefore b e
observed.
9 Warning
Have the brak e fluid changed by a
work shop. O bserve the legal
requirements for disposal of brake fluid,
to protect of the environm ent and y our
health.
Servic e, Mainten ance 233
Windscreen wiper Wiper blades whose lips have become
Clea r vision is essential for safe driv ing. hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone
must be replac ed. This may be necessary
Therefore, check wind screen wiper and as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt
headlight wash/wip e system 3 regularly for or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning
cleaning effect. We recomm end replacing agents.
the wiper blades after a y ear at most.
S witc h off w indscreen wiper if using a car
If the windows are dirty, op erate the wash see p ages 11, 204.
wind screen wash before switching the
wiper on, in order to prevent wiper blade Wiper care see page 204.
wear.
Do not switch windscreen wiper on if
wind ow s a re icy , since this may damage
the wiper ed ges or the w ip er system.
If the wiper becomes froz en on to the glass,
we recom mend that it be released w ith the
aid of Vaux hall De-icer Spray before
starting the v ehicle, to prev ent w iper motor
damage.
Smearing wiper blades can be c leaned with
a soft c loth and Vauxhall Windscreen
Wash Solvent.
234 Service, Maintenance
Pictu re no: 13328j.tif
Wiper bla des on t he w indscreen
Lift wiper arm . Move release lever and
detach wiper blade.
Picture no: 9392t.tif
Wi per blad e on the rear w indow 3
Lift wiper arm. Diseng age wiper b la de a s
shown in illustration and remove.
Picture no: 14245s.tif
Win dscreen and h eadlight
wash systems 3
Reservoir for windscreen wash system a nd
rear window wash system in engine
compa rtm ent beneath the wind screen
wiper on the driv ers side of the vehicle.
 Servic e, Mainten ance 235

The windscreen wash system and

headlight wash system w ill not freeze in
winter:

Frost protection Mixture of

down to Vaux hall
Windscreen Wash
S olv ent: Water
5 C 1 :3
10 C 1 :2
20 C 1 :1
30 C 2 :1

When closing the reservoir, p ress the lid

Pict ure no: 14246s.t if
In vehicles with head lig ht wash system 3,
the opening for refilling is in the engine
compartment behind the head lig hts on the
drivers side of the v ehicle.
Ca pacities see p ages 219, 220.
Fill only with clean w ater to prevent the
nozzles from clogging. To improve
cleaning efficiency, we recommend that
you add a little Vauxhall Wind screen Wash
Solvent.
firmly over the beaded ed ge a ll the way
round.
Pi cture no: 13488a.t if
Battery
The battery is m aintenance-free.
9 Warnin g
Have the b attery c hanged by a
workshop. Observ e the legal
requirem ents for d isposal of old batteries
to protect the environment a nd your
health.
236 Service, Maintenance

Retro-fitting of electrical or electronic Protecting elec tro nic components Disconnecting/connecting the b attery
accessories can discharge or add extra In order to prevent faults in electronic from /t o the electr ical syst em
load to the battery . O btain advice on the components in the electrica l sy stem, nev er Disconnect the b attery from the vehic le
tec hnical p ossibilities, e. g. use of a more connect or disconnect battery with engine electrical system before charging :
powerful ba ttery, from a workshop. running or ignition switched on. Never start First detach the negative and then the
engine w ith b attery disconnected, e.g. positive lea d. Do not reverse the p ola rity of
Parking the vehicle for more than 4 weeks
when starting using jump leads. the battery, i.e. do not confuse the
can lead to ba ttery discharging. This may
term ina ls for the positive and negative
red uce the service life of the b attery. To avoid dam aging the v ehicle, do not leads. When connecting, start with the
Disconnect battery from on-board power make any m od ifica tions to the electrical positive lead a nd then connect the
sup ply by disconnecting the neg ativ e sy stem, e.g. connecting additional neg ative lead.
term inal. consumers or tamp ering with electronic
The Vaux hall alarm sy stem 3 siren m ust b e control units (chip tuning).
deactivated as follows: switch the ignition
on then off, disconnect the vehicles 9 Warning
battery within 15 sec onds.
Electronic ignition systems generate very
Ensure ignition is switched off before high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
connecting battery. Then perform the system; hig h voltage can be fatal.
follow ing actions:
z Set date a nd time in information
display see pa ge 94,
z If necessary, activate the window
elec tronics 3 see page 40,
z Calibrate steering angle
sensor (ES PP lu s ) 3, see pag e 150.
In order to prev ent the b attery from
discharging , som e c onsumers suc h as the
courtesy light automatically switch off
after approx. 30 minutes.

Vehicle decomm issioning
O bserve na tional regulations.
If the vehicle is to be parked for severa l
months, to avoid da mage have the
follow ing work performed by a workshop:
z Wash and preserve the vehicle see
page 202,
z Check corrosion protection in engine
com partment a nd on underbody a nd
make good if necessary,
z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on
bonnet and doors,
z Change engine oil see page 229,
z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion
protection see page 231,
z Check the coola nt level, top up with anti-
freeze if nec essary see pag e 231,
z Empty windsc reen w ash system and
headlight wash system 3 reservoirs,
z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified
for full load see page 216.
Vehicle storag e
z Park v ehicle in a dry and well ventilated
place. With manual transmission, selec t
first gear or reverse gea r, and with
Easy tronic 3 , move selector lever to
midd le position before switching ignition
off. Use wedges or the like to prevent
vehicle from rolling.
z Do not apply handbrake,
z Disconnect battery by disengaging
neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical
system see page 236.
Servic e, Mainten ance 237
Vehicle recommissioning
O bserve national regulations.
Perform the following work before
recommissioning the vehicle:
z Connect ba ttery see page 236,
z Check tyre pressure, correc t if
necessary see page 216,
z Fill up w indscreen wash system a nd
headlight wash system 3 reservoirs see
page 234,
z Check engine oil level see p age 228,
z Check the coolant level, top up with anti-
freez e if necessa ry see pa ge 231,
z Fit the num ber p la te, if necessary.
238 In dex
Index A B
AB S (Anti-lock Braking Sy stem) .. .... ..... 156
Ac cessories ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 176
Ac cessory socket .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 79
Ad aptive brake lights . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 154
Ad aptive Forward Lighting (AFL) .... ..... 109
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 193
Driving abroad .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 113
Air conditioning system .. .... .... ..... . 117, 123
Air intak e ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 131
Air recirculation system ... .... .... ..... . 123, 130
Air vents .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 118
Airba gs .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 67
Ala rm siren ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 36
Alterna tor .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 87
Antenna .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 114, 202
Anti-corrosion service . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 226
Anti-freeze ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 230
Anti-freeze protection ..... .... .... ..... . 230, 234
Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ... .... ..... .... ..... 142
O ctane number ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 208
Anti-theft alarm sy stem .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 34
Anti-theft lock
Alloy wheels ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 180
Anti-theft protection .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 15
Aq ua planing .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 161
Arm rest .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 47
Ashtray .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 80, 112
Automatic anti-da zzle interior mirror .. .. 38
AU X input . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 115
Battery . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 139, 218, 235
Interruption of p ow er supply .. .... 40, 137
Battery discharge protection . .... ..... .... . 113
Before starting-off . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 14
Belt tensioners ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 59
Bleeding, diesel fuel sy stem ... .... ..... .... . 170
Bonnet .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 170
Boot, see Luggage compartment ... . 32, 52
Brake assist ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 154
Brake lights ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 154, 197
Brake system ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 154
Brakes
ABS ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 156
Adaptive brake lights . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 154
Brake assist .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 154
Brake fluid . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 207, 232
Brake lights .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 197
Brake servo unit . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138
Handbrake ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 15, 155
Bulb replacem ent .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 190
 Index 239

C Control indica tors .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 8, 84 D
ABS (Anti-lock Brak ing System ) ... ..... 157
Ca pacities .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .219, 220 Dashboard, see Instrum ent panel .. .... .... ..6
Adaptive Forward Lighting
Ca r Pass .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 26 Data . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 26, 206
(AFL) .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 84, 109
Ca ra van / trailer towing .. ..... .... .... ..... .... 138 Date .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 94
Airbags .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 72
Ca re ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 202 Day tim e running lights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 105
Belt tensioners ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60
Ca ta lytic converter . ..... .... ..... .... .... .149, 171 Decommissioning .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 237
C ruise c ontrol . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 151
Central locking system .... ..... .... .... ..... 28, 30 Demisting a nd defrosting
Engine electronics ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 147
Centre console lighting ... ..... .... .... .111, 112 Windows .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 122
EPS (Electric Power S teering) ... .... ..... .. 88
Changing the radio frequenc y With Electronic Clim ate C ontrol .. .... . 128
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .... 149
remote c ontrol battery .. ..... .... .... ... 29, 218 With the air conditioning system .... . 125
Exhaust .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 147
Changing ty re / wheel type .. .... .... ..... .... 158 Diesel fuel filter .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 230
Imm obiliser . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 27
Changing wheels .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 178 Diesel fuel system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 170, 230
Coolant .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 230
Chassis number, see Diesel particle filter 88, 119, 130, 139, 148
Coolant level .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 231
Vehicle Identification Number ... ..... .... 207 Dimensions .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 221
Coolant temp erature d isplay . ..... .... ..... .. 90
Child restraint systems .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 65 Dipped beam ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 10
Correcting time .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 97
Child safety locks .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 36, 40 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 191, 193
Coupling sock et load . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 167
Ciga rette lig hter .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 79, 112 Display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 92
Courtesy lights ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111
Clutch operation . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139 Display m ode ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 99
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 200
CO 2 emissions ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 212 Door locks . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 26, 204
Cruise control . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 151
Coin holder . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 83 Driving ab road .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 224, 225
Curtain airbags .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 71
Cold start .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139 Head lig hts . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113
Curve lighting (AFL) .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 25, 109
Colour Information Display .. .... .... ..... .... .. 95 Toll system s .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 115
Contrast .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 98 Driving hints .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138
240 In dex
E F
Ea sy tronic ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 13, 132
Driv ing programmes .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 134
Fault .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 137
Interrup tion of power sup ply ... ..... .... 137
Kickdown .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 135
Selector lever ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 13, 133
Winter prog ra mme .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 135
Ec onomical driving . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 140
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .... .... ..... .... .. 88
Towing .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 173
Electric windows .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 39
Fault .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 40
Electrical system . .... ..... .... ..... 186, 218, 236
Electronic Climate Control (EC C) .. ..... .... 126
Electronic components .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 236
Electronic immobiliser .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 27
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..... .... 149
Engine code ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .208, 209
Engine control indicator .. ..... .... .... ..... .... 147
Engine oil .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 228
Engine oil filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 229
Engine oil level and
consum ption . ..... .... ..... .... ..... 208, 209, 228
Engine oil pressure .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 86
Engine sp eed .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139
Engine wash ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 205
Env ironmenta l protection .... .... .... .202, 229
Ex haust control indicator ..... .... .... ..... .... 147
Ex haust ga ses ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 148
Ex haust system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 148
Ex terior mirrors .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 4, 36, 119
Fan ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..117, 120, 227
Filling station
C apacities .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 219, 220
Engine oil lev el .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 228
Fuel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 208, 209
O pening the bonnet .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 170
Tyre pressure .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 141, 216
Vehicle data ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 206, 207
Windscreen wa sh system .... ..... .... ..... 234
First-a id kit ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 176
Flat ty re . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 182
FlexSpa ce .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 51
Fog tail lig ht ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 197
Footbrake .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 154, 155
Front fog lights .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 106
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196
Front passengers airbag ... .... ..... .... ..... .. 67
Fuel .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..142, 208, 209
Fuel consumption ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 140, 212
Fuel filter ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 230
Fuel level ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 90
Fuel sy stem, diesel .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 170
Fuel tank
Fuel gauge . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 90
Fuses .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 186
G
Gears .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 13
Generator, see Alternator .. ..... .... ..... .... ... 87
Genuine Vaux hall Parts
a nd Accessories ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 224
Glasses compartment .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 82
Glove compartment .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 81
Glove compartment lighting .. .... ..... .... . 112
Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 201
Cooling .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 119
Graphical I nformation Display ... ..... .... ... 92
Gross Vehicle Weight ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 214
H
Halogen headlight system ..... .... ..... .... . 191
Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191
Driv ing abroad .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113
Handb ra ke .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 15, 155
Haz ard warning lights ... .... ..... .... .... 10, 107
Head restraints .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 21, 45, 46
Headlight flash .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 10
Headlight range adjustment .. .... .. 107, 190
Headlight switch ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 9, 105
Headlight wash system . .... ..... 11, 104, 234
Headlights .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..9
Changing bulbs . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191
Daytime running lights ... ..... .... ..... .... . 105
Driv ing abroad .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113
Front fog lights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 106
Reversing lig hts .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 107
Wa rning device .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 103

Heated exterior mirrors ... ..... ... 12, 119, 130
Heated rear window .... .... ..... ... 12, 119, 130
Heated seats .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 119
Heating ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .117, 121
Seats ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 119
With Electronic Climate C ontrol .... .... 127
With the air conditioning system .. .... 117
Height adjustment
Seat belts .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 62
Steering wheel . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 9
High-pressure cleaners ... ..... 166, 203, 205
Horn ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 11
I Tyre pressure . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..159, 216
Identification plate . ..... .... ..... .... .... .206, 207
Ignition sy stem .... .... ..... .... ..... 227, 235, 236
Imm ob iliser . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 27
Information display ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 92
Infotainm ent system .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 114
Instrument display .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 89
Instrument illum ination ... ..... .... .... ..... .... 111
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 201
Instrument pa nel . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 6
Instruments .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 6, 84, 89
Interior mirror . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 5, 38
Interruption of power supply ... .... ..... .... 101
Easytronic ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 137
Elec tric sunroof .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 42
Elec tric wind ow s .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 40
Elec tronic S ta bility Program . .... .150, 235
ISO -FIX .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 64
Index 241
J M
Main b eam .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 10
Jack .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 176, 180
Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 192, 194
Jump leads ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 172
Control indica tor .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 86
K Maintenance
Air cond itioning system . ..... .... ..... .... . 131
Keys ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 26
Anti-freeze protection .... ..... .... ..... .... . 230
Extending ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 26
Brake fluid . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 232
Ignition lock .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 14, 27
Brakes .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 154
Locking doors ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 28, 30, 36
Cataly tic conv erter ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 149
Remove .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 15
Engine oil ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 228, 229
Starting .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 27
Fuel consumption .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141
Starting the engine . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 14
L Tyres . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 160
Windscreen wiper .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 233
Language selection .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 97
Lashing ey es .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 56 Manual transmission . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 13
Mechanical anti-theft locking system ... 30
Leather trim ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 204
Light switch .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 Tow ing equipment ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 165
Mirrors .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 5, 38
Lighting . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 9, 105
Driving abroad .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 113 Misted wind ow s . .... .... ..... .... ...122, 125, 128
Mobile telephone .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 116
Loading the vehicle .... ..... .... .... 56, 166, 214
Locking d oors .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 2, 28, 30, 36 Muffler, see Exhaust sy stem ... .... ..... .... . 148
Locks .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 204 N
Lubricants . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 207, 228
N um ber plate lighting ... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
Luggag e comp artm ent ... .... .... ..... .... . 32, 52
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 201 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
N um ber plates ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 237
C ov er . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 54
Extension .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 32, 52
Lighting . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 112
Loading . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 56, 166, 214
Lumba r support . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 44
242 In dex
O Q
O ctane numbers . .... ..... .... ..... 142, 208, 209
O dometer ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 89
O il chang e .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 229
O il filter change .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 229
O il level and consum ption .... 208, 209, 228
O il pressure .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 86
O perating temperature ... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139
O utside temperature ga uge .... .... ..... .... .. 93
O verrun ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .139, 141
P Reading lig hts .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 112
Paintwork dama ge . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203
Parking ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 15
Parking distance sensors . ..... .... .... ..... .... 153
Parking lights . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 9
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 195
Parts ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 224
Peda ls ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139
Performance ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 210
Petrol . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 142
Pinking .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 142
Pollen filter . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 131
Power steering,
see Electric Power Steering (EPS) .... .... .. 88
Preheating .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 88
Pushing, towing .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 171
S
S afeguard ag ainst
Quickhea t .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 121, 127
unauthorised use . .... ..... .... ..... 9, 16, 27, 36
R S afety a ccessories . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 176
S afety net .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 55
Radio . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 24, 114
S afety system s ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 114
Radio eq uipm ent (CB) ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116
S aving energy .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138
Radio frequency rem ote control .. .... ..... .. 28
S eat ad justment .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 3, 43, 50
C entral locking system .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 28
S eat belts .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 62, 204
Steering wheel ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 24, 114
S eat height adjustment . .... ..... .... ..... ... 3, 44
Radio reception . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 114
S eat occupancy recognition ... .... ..... .... ... 73
S eat position . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 3, 43, 44
Rear light cluster ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 105
S eats . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 3, 43
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 197
Extending the luggag e
Rear seats . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 50
compartment . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 32, 52
Rear w indow wash system .. .... 12, 104, 234
Heated sea ts . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 119
Refuelling .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 143
S elec tor lever ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 133
Fuel filler ca p .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 144
S elf-diagnosis .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60, 73, 157
Replacement key s .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 26
S elf-help
Reversing lights .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107
Central lock ing sy stem ... ..... .... ..... .... ... 31
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 197
Electric windows .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 39
Roof load ... ..... .... ..... .... .... 57, 138, 141, 214
Informa tion display .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 94
Roof rac ks . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 141, 163
Radio frequenc y remote control . .... ... 29
Running-in . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 138
S elf-help, vehicle care ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 170
Brakes .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 154
S ervice interval d isplay .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 226
S ervice work .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 226
S id e airba gs .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 69
S ig nal sy stem ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 10, 11
S pare k eys . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 26

Spa re wheel .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .177, 178
Speed . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .140, 141
Fuel consumption .... .... ..... .... .... .140, 141
Speed om eter .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 89
Starter sw itch . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 14, 27
Starting the engine . ..... .... ... 9, 27, 133, 171
Self-help .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 171
Steam-jet cleaners .. ..... .... ..... 166, 203, 205
Steering column lock ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 9, 15
Steering wheel ad justment .. .... .... ..... .... .... 9
Steering wheel remote c ontrol . .... ...24, 114
Stowage comp artm ents .. ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 81
Sunroof ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 41
Fault .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 42
Sunshad e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 42
Sunvisors . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..83
Sy stem settings ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 96
Index 243
Travel Assistant . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 22, 47
T Trea d depth .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 160
Ta bles .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 83 Trip comp uter .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 23, 99
Ta chom eter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 89 Trip odometer .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 89
Ta ilg ate.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 36 Triple Informa tion Display . ..... .... ..... .... ... 92
Ta il lights ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 105 Turn lighting (AFL) . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 109
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 197 Turn signal lig hts ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 10, 106
Technical data ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 206 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 196, 197
Telep hone, see Mobile telephone ... ..... 116 Twin Audio .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 24, 115
Temperature regula tion . .... .... ..... .120, 127 Tyre chains .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 162, 216
Temporary spa re wheel .. .... .... ..... . 162, 178 Tyre condition .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 160
The first 600 miles (1000 km) . ..... .... ..... 138 Tyre pressure ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 159, 216
Tig htening torque ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 182, 216 Tyre rep air kit .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 182
Tim e ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 94 Tyres . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 158
Toll system s .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 115
Tools .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 176
Towing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 173
Towing equipment . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 163
Towing eye ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 173, 175
Tra iler / caravan towing . .... .... ..... .... ..... 138
Tra nsmission .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 13
Tra nsmission, Easytronic .... .... ..... .... ..... 132
Driving programm es ... .... .... ..... .... ..... 134
Fault ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 137
Interruption of power supply ... .... ..... 137
K ic kdown .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135
Selector lever .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 13, 133
Winter programm e . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135
244 In dex
U W
Units of m easure . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..98
Unlead ed fuel ..... .... ..... . 142, 145, 208, 209
Used oil ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 229
V Weights . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 214
Valve cap key ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 159
Vauxhall Service . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 224
Vehicle care .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 202
Vehicle decomm issioning ..... .... .... ..... .... 237
Vehicle identification number .. .... ..... .... 207
Vehicle key s, see Key s . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..26
Vehicle recommissioning . ..... .... .... ..... .... 237
Ventilation .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 117, 121, 129
X
Warning buzzers .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 103 Xenon head lig ht system
Warning triangle .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 176 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 193
Wash fluid reserv oir, Driv ing abroad .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113
windsc reen w ash system ... .... ..... .... ..... 234
Welcome light function ... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110
Deactivate... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110
Wheels ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 158
Windows .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 38
Demisting and defrosting .122, 125, 128
Windscreen wash sy stem .... .... 11, 104, 234
Anti-freeze protec tion . .... .... ..... .... ..... 234
C apacities .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 219, 220
Wash fluid reservoir ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 234
Windscreen wiper ... .... ..... .... .... 11, 103, 233
Winter mode
Starting-off aid ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135
Winter op eration
Battery ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 139
C oolant, a nti-freeze .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 230
Fuel consum ption ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 141
Fuel for diesel engines . .... .... ..... .... ..... 142
Heating .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 117
Locks .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 204
Tyre chains . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .162, 216
Window demisting
and d efrosting .... .... ..... .... ..122, 125, 128
Windscreen wa sh system,
anti-freeze p rotection . .... .... ..... .... ..... 234
Winter prog ra mme . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135
Winter tyres .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 216
 Owners Manual
MERIVA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

M E R I VA
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: January 2007.

TS 1578-B-07